Philips DVD Recorder DMR XS350EB User Manual

Operating Instructions

DVD Recorder

Model No. DMR-XS350EB

Dear customer

Thank you for purchasing this product.

For optimum performance and safety, please read these instructions carefully.

Before connecting, operating or adjusting this product, please read the instructions completely.

Please keep this manual for future reference.

Note: “EB” on the packaging indicates the United Kingdom.

Trademark of the DVB Digital Video Broadcasting Project

Declaration of Conformity, No. 6263, 12th December 2008

This DVD Recorder is for viewing and recording free to view channels only, not Pay TV or encrypted channels.

This unit does not have a terrestrial tuner.

Region management information

DVD-Video

Example:

The unit plays DVD-Video marked with labels containing the region number “2” or “ALL”.

ALL

Web Site: http://www.panasonic-europe.com

RQT9431-1B

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Accessories

Please check and identify the supplied accessories. Use numbers indicated in parentheses when asking for replacement parts.

(Product numbers correct as of April 2009. These may be subject to change.)

Remote control (N2QAYB000339)

AC mains lead (K2CT3CA00004)

• For use with this unit only. Do not use it with

other equipment. Also, do not use cords for

other equipment with this unit.

Batteries for remote control

(R6 Size)

• Or go on line through our Internet Accessory ordering application

at shop.panasonic.co.uk.

• Most major credit and debit cards accepted.

• All enquiries transactions and distribution facilities are provided

directly by Panasonic UK Ltd.

Sales and Support Information

Customer Care Centre

• For customers within the UK: 0844 844 3852

• For customers within the Republic of Ireland: 01 289 8333

• Visit our website for product information

www.panasonic.co.uk

• It couldn’t be simpler!

• Also available through our Internet is direct shopping for a wide

range of finished products, take a browse on our website for

further details shop.panasonic.co.uk.

• E-mail: [email protected]

Direct Sales at Panasonic UK

• For customers: 0844 844 3856

Interested in purchasing an extended guarantee?

Please call 0870 240 6284 or visit our website

www.panasonic.co.uk/guarantee.

• Order accessory and consumable items for your product with

ease and confidence by phoning our Customer Care Centre

Monday–Thursday 9:00 a.m.– 5:30 p.m., Friday 9:30 a.m.– 5:30

p.m. (Excluding public holidays).

Caution for AC Mains Lead

For your safety, please read the following text carefully.

WARNING: DO NOT CONNECT EITHER WIRE TO THE

EARTH TERMINAL WHICH IS MARKED WITH THE

This appliance is supplied with a moulded three pin mains plug for

your safety and convenience.

A 5-ampere fuse is fitted in this plug.

LETTER E, BY THE EARTH SYMBOL

OR GREEN/YELLOW.

OR COLOURED GREEN

Should the fuse need to be replaced please ensure that the

replacement fuse has a rating of 5-ampere and that it is approved by

ASTA or BSI to BS1362.

THIS PLUG IS NOT WATERPROOF—KEEP DRY.

Before use

Remove the connector cover.

Check for the ASTA mark

fuse.

or the BSI mark

on the body of the

How to replace the fuse

If the plug contains a removable fuse cover you must ensure that it is

refitted when the fuse is replaced.

If you lose the fuse cover the plug must not be used until a

replacement cover is obtained.

The location of the fuse differ according to the type of AC mains plug

(figures A and B). Confirm the AC mains plug fitted and follow the

instructions below.

Illustrations may differ from actual AC mains plug.

A replacement fuse cover can be purchased from your local dealer.

1. Open the fuse cover with a screwdriver.

CAUTION!

Figure A

Figure B

IF THE FITTED MOULDED PLUG IS UNSUITABLE FOR THE

SOCKET OUTLET IN YOUR HOME THEN THE FUSE SHOULD

BE REMOVED AND THE PLUG CUT OFF AND DISPOSED OF

SAFELY.

Fuse cover

THERE IS A DANGER OF SEVERE ELECTRICAL SHOCK IF THE

CUT OFF PLUG IS INSERTED INTO ANY 13-AMPERE SOCKET.

If a new plug is to be fitted please observe the wiring code as stated

below.

If in any doubt please consult a qualified electrician.

IMPORTANT

2. Replace the fuse and close or attach the fuse cover.

Figure A Figure B

The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the

following code:

Blue: Neutral, Brown: Live.

As these colours may not correspond with the coloured markings

identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:

The wire which is coloured Blue must be connected to the terminal

which is marked with the letter N or coloured Black or Blue.

The wire which is coloured Brown must be connected to the terminal

which is marked with the letter L or coloured Brown or Red.

Fuse

(5 ampere)

Fuse

(5 ampere)

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table of Contents

TV Guide system (freesat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Using the TV Guide list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Selecting the programme from the desired channel genre or

programme type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Getting started

Getting Started

Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3

Sales and Support Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3

Caution for AC Mains Lead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3

HDD (Hard disk drive) Handling Care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6

Remote Control Information/Unit Care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7

Remote Control Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7

Unit Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7

Playing Back

Advanced Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45

Selecting Titles to Play. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45

Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46

Skip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46

Quick View (Play x1.3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46

Direct Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46

Slow-motion Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46

Frame-by-Frame Viewing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47

Time Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47

Manual Skip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47

Create Chapters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47

Display the subtitle during play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47

Quick Start Guide

Location of Parts/Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

The Unit’s Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Main Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Basic Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

When your Television has an HDMI input terminal. . . . . . . . . . . 10

When your Television does not have an HDMI input terminal . . 12

Auto Set Up (freesat). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Playback of the High Deﬁnition Video (AVCHD) and

playlists. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48

Playback of the High Deﬁnition Video (AVCHD) . . . . . . . . . . . . .48

Playback of the playlists created on other equipment . . . . . . . . .48

Playing DivX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49

Playing DivX video contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49

Editing

Tuning in Other Satellite Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16

HDD and Disc Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18

Recording and copying programmes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

HDD and Disc Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

HDD and discs you can use for recording and play. . . . . . . . . . .20

Play-only discs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22

Discs that cannot be played. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22

Types of disc for the type of connected TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22

USB Memory and Card Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23

USB memories you can use on this unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23

Cards usable on this unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23

Titles−Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51

Accessing the Title View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51

Title Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51

Create/Playback/Edit of the Chapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54

Create Chapter Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54

Editing and playing chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54

Chapter operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54

Copying

Copying Titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55

Copy direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55

Copy speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56

Copy restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56

Copying list icons and functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56

Frequently Asked Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57

Copy Title Playing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58

Copying using the copying list—Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59

Copying a ﬁnalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video

format), +R and +R DL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61

Basic Operations

Watching Television (freesat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Selecting a channel with TV Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Watching Television of the Other Satellite Service . . 25

Selecting a channel with the channel list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

HDD

Recording Television Programmes

. . . . . . . . . . 27

With Other Equipment

Timer Recording Using the TV Guide

HDD

(freesat)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Recording from a Satellite or Cable Receiver . . . . . . . .62

Manual Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62

Linked timer recordings with external equipment

Recording the ITV HD, etc. programme. . . . . . . . . . 29

Copying Titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Deleting Titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

DELETE Navigator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Delete Titles During Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

(SKY Digital STB, satellite/cable receiver)–EXT LINK. . . . . . . .62

Recording from an External Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63

Recording from a VCR, etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63

Recording from a DV Camcorder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64

Recording via AV3 Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65

Flexible Recording via AV Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65

Copying HD Video (AVCHD format) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66

From an SD card or Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66

From a video equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66

Copying SD Video (MPEG2 format). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67

From an SD card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67

From a video equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67

Title

Recording

Important Notes for Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33

Advanced Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35

Recording modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

2 programmes simultaneous recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Still pictures

Still Picture

Specifying the Recording Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37

Direct TV Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37

Playing while you are recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37

Operation during Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

Playing still pictures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68

Useful functions during still picture play. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69

HDD

Advanced Timer Recording

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39

Editing still pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70

Editing still pictures (JPEG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70

Still pictures operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71

Manual timer recordings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39

Series recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40

To cancel a timer recording in progress. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41

Auto Renewal Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41

If the “Overlapped Timer Recording” screen appears . . . . . . . . .41

Check, Change, Delete Programmes, or Resolve Overlapping. .41

To deactivate timer programme

Copying still pictures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72

Copying all the still pictures on the USB memory

—Copy All Pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72

Copying new still pictures on the SD card

—Copy New Pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72

Copying using the copying list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72

Deleting still pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74

(e.g. to interrupt a daily or weekly timer programming) . . . . . . .42

Notes on timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Reference

Music

Additional Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109

Adding a VCR: Connecting to a Television

and a Video Cassette Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109

Adding a Digital Satellite or Cable Receiver: Connecting to a

Television and a Digital Satellite or Cable Receiver . . . . . . . .109

Using an Audio/Video Cable (not included) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110

Using an S Video Cable (not included). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110

Using Component Video Cables (not included) . . . . . . . . . . . . .110

Using an Audio Cable (not included) for Better Sound . . . . . . .111

Using a Optical Digital Audio Cable (not included)

for Better Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111

Connecting with an HDMI (High Deﬁnition Multimedia

Interface) Terminal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111

Network connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112

Playing music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75

Playing MP3 ﬁles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75

Playing music CD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75

Playing music recorded on HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76

Useful functions during music play. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77

Editing music/playlist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78

Editing music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78

Album and track operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78

Editing Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79

Playlist operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79

Copying music to HDD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80

About the Gracenote^®Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80

Copying music from a disc or a USB memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80

Deleting music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81

Operations that can be performed simultaneously. . . 113

Operations that can be performed while recording

or copying a title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Starting of the timer recording

while executing other operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Frequently Asked Questions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114

Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116

When removing a recorded disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117

Media (Disc/USB Memory/SD Card) Handling . . . . . . .118

Troubleshooting Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119

Speciﬁcations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130

Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134

Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138

Others

Convenient Functions

Entering Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82

Enjoying VIERA CAST™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83

Linked Operations with the TV

(VIERA Link “HDAVI Control™”/Q Link) . . . . . . . . . . 84

Easy control only with VIERA remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Setting On-Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86

Accessing the On-Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86

Information Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88

Digital Satellite Channel Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88

Status Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89

Convenient Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90

FUNCTION MENU display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90

Switch the aspect ratio of the screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90

To pause the TV programme you are watching

—Pause Live TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91

Disc and Card Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92

Accessing the Management Menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92

Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95

Accessing the Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95

Channel Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95

HDD/Disc Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98

Picture and Sound Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99

Display and Connection Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101

Network Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103

System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104

Other Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105

HOLD function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105

Using the Unit’s Remote Control to Operate the TV . . . . . . . . .105

Network Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Testing the connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Setting the IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Setting the DNS-IP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Setting the connection speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Setting the proxy server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Setting the network service (VIERA CAST). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Software Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

If a software update is available, a notiﬁcation is displayed . . . 108

The unit’s display during the update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

About descriptions in these operating instructions

• Pages to be referred to are indicated as “➔ ꢀꢀ”.

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HDD (Hard disk drive) Handling Care

The HDD is a high precision recording instrument and because of its long recording capability and high speed operation it is a very special

device that is easily suscept ble to damage.

As a basic rule, save important content to a disc as backup.

■ The HDD is a device that is not built to withstand vibration/shock or dust

Depending on the setup environment and handling of the HDD some content may become damaged and play and recording may no longer be

possible. Especially during operation, do not subject the unit to any v bration, shock, or remove the AC mains lead from the household mains

socket. In the event of a power failure during recording or play, the content may be damaged.

■ The HDD is a temporary storage device

The HDD is not an everlasting storage device for recorded content. Use the HDD as a temporary storage place for one-off viewing, editing, or

copying. It is recommended to save the recorded content on a disc or to keep the original data or CDs that they were copied from.

■ Immediately save (backup) all content as soon as you feel there may be a problem with the HDD

If there is an irregularity within the HDD, repetitive strange sounds or problems with picture (block noise, etc.) may result. Using the HDD in this

condition may worsen the problem and in the worst case the HDD may no longer be usable. As soon as you notice this type of problem, copy all

content to disc and request service. Recorded content (data) on an HDD that has become unusable is unrecoverable.

ꢁWhen the unit is turned on or off, there may be an unexpected sound. This does not indicate a problem with this unit.

■ Setup precautions

■ Cigarette smoke etc. causes malfunction or

ꢁDo not place in an enclosed area where the rear cooling fan

and the cooling vents on the side are covered up.

ꢁPlace the unit on a surface that is ﬂat and not subject to

vibration or impact.

breakdown

The unit may breakdown if cigarette smoke or bug spray/vapor, etc.

gets inside the unit.

■ While operating

ꢁDo not place on anything that generates

much heat, for example an audio

ampliﬁer.

ꢁDo not place in an area often subject to

temperature changes.

ꢁPlace in an area where condensation does

not occur. Condensation is a phenomenon

ꢁDo not move the unit or subject to vibration or impact. (The HDD

may become damaged.)

DO NOT

ꢁDo not remove the AC mains lead from the household mains

socket, or ﬂip the power breaker switch.

While the unit is on, the HDD is rotating at high speed. Sound or

movement due to rotation is normal.

This unit

Ampliﬁer

where moisture forms on a cold surface

when there is an extreme change in

■ When moving the unit

1 Turn the unit off. (Wait until “BYE” disappears from the display.)

2 Remove the AC mains lead from the household mains socket.

3 Move only after the unit has come to a complete stop (approx. 2

minutes) in order to avoid subjecting to vibration and shock.

(Even after turning the unit off, the HDD continues operating for a

short time.)

temperature. Condensation may cause internal damage to the unit.

ꢁConditions where condensation may occur

–When there is an extreme change in temperature (moving from a

very hot location to a very cold location, or vice versa, or when

subjected to an air conditioner or when cooled air directly impacts

the unit). When the HDD (warms during operation) is subjected to

cold air, condensation may form on the inside of the HDD and

may cause damage to the HDD heads, etc.

–When there is high humidity or a lot of steam in the room.

–During the rainy season.

In the above situation, without turning the unit on, let the unit

adjust to the room temperature and wait 2–3 hours until

condensation is gone.

■ Indemnity concerning recorded content

Panasonic does not accept any respons bility for damages directly or indirectly due to any type of problems that result in loss of recording or

edited content (data), and does not guarantee any content if recording or editing does not work properly. Likewise, the above also applies in a

case where any type of repair is made to the unit (including any other non-HDD related component).

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Remote Control Information/Unit Care

Remote Control Information

About batteries

Using the remote control

• Insert so the poles ( and ) match those in the remote control.

Aim at the sensor, avoiding obstacles, up to a maximum range of 7 m

directly in front of the unit.

Remote control signal sensor

R6/LR6, AA

• Use alkaline or manganese batteries.

• Do not mix old and new batteries.

• Do not use different types at the same time.

• Do not heat or expose to flame.

• Do not leave the batteries in an automobile exposed to direct

sunlight for a long period of time with doors and windows closed.

• Do not take apart or short circuit.

• Do not attempt to recharge alkaline or manganese batteries.

• Do not use batteries if the covering has been peeled off.

Mishandling of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage which can

damage items the fluid contacts and may cause a fire.

Remove if the remote control is not going to be used for a long period

of time. Store in a cool, dark place.

Unit Care

The precision parts in this unit are readily affected by the

environment, especially temperature, humidity, and dust.

Cigarette smoke also can cause malfunction or breakdown.

Do not place the unit on

ampliﬁers or equipment that may

become hot.

DO NOT

The heat can damage the unit.

To clean this unit, wipe with a soft, dry cloth.

• Never use alcohol, paint thinner or benzine to clean this unit.

• Before using chemically treated cloth, carefully read the instructions

that came with the cloth.

Observe the following points to ensure continued listening and

viewing pleasure.

Dust and dirt may adhere to the unit’s lens over time, making it

Select a position with good ventilation when installing the unit. Do

not block the cooling fan on the rear of the unit.

impossible to record or play discs.

Before moving the unit, ensure the disc tray is empty.

Failure to do so will risk severely damaging the disc and

the unit.

Use the Lens cleaner (not included) about once every year,

depending on frequency of use and the operating environment.

Carefully read the lens cleaner’s instructions before use.

Lens cleaner: RP-CL720E

The manufacturer accepts no responsibility and offers no compensation for loss of recorded or edited

material due to a problem with the unit or recordable media, and accepts no responsibility and offers

no compensation for any subsequent damage caused by such loss.

Examples of causes of such losses are

• A disc copied and edited with this unit is played in a DVD Recorder or computer disc drive manufactured by another

company.

• A disc used as described above and then played again in this unit.

• A disc recorded and edited with a DVD Recorder or computer disc drive manufactured by another company is played in

this unit.

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Location of Parts/Controls

Remote Control

Turn the unit on or off.............................................. (➔ 13)

Select drive [HDD, DVD or SD]......................... (➔ 26, 68)

Select channels and title numbers etc./Enter numbers

or characters (The character buttons may be used when

operating VIERA CAST contents.)

o delete unwanted recorded titles, timer programmes,

still pictures or music.............................(➔ 32, 41, 74, 81)

Basic operations for recording and play

Show the digital satellite channel information ........ (➔ 88)

Programme information within TV Guide screen ... (➔ 43)

Show status messages........................................... (➔ 89)

Show DIRECT NAVIGATOR/Top Menu ........... (➔ 26, 45)

Selection/OK, Frame-by-frame......................... (➔ 13, 47)

Show OPTION menu

Use Colour buttons according to on-screen instructions.

– for switching the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen

– for TV Guide operations

PAGE

abc

def

jkl

ghi

mno

tuv

xyz

qrs

DEL

SKIP

– disactivating timer programme

– for selecting programme category

– for editing favourites

Recording function

PLAY/x13

[

REC]: Start recording ............................................................... (➔ 27)

[REC MODE]: Change recording mode........................................ (➔ 62)

[EXT LINK]: Linked timer recordings with external equipment ..... (➔ 62)

[

DIRECT TV REC]: Direct TV recording.................................... (➔ 37)

Show Digital TEXT (MHEG)/Teletext service......... (➔ 89)

Show subtitles......................................................... (➔ 89)

Transmission window

TV operations ....................................................... (➔ 105)

Channel select/Change pages in the

TV Guide system........................................(➔ 24, 27, 43)

Show VIERA CAST ................................................ (➔ 83)

Input select (freesat, Other Sat., AV1, AV2, AV3, AV4,

DV)........................................................(➔ 24, 25, 62, 63)

Skip approx. 1 minute forward................................ (➔ 47)

Exit the menu screen

Show the TV Guide screen.........................(➔ 24, 28, 43)

Show FUNCTION MENU display........................... (➔ 90)

By using the FUNCTION MENU display you may

access the main functions (Playback, Recording, etc.)

quickly and easily.

BACK/

RETURN

PROG/CHECK

Return to previous screen

Skip the specified time ........................................... (➔ 47)

Create chapters...................................................... (➔ 54)

Show timer recording list ........................................ (➔ 39)

Show menu for disc playback etc........................... (➔ 86)

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The Unit’s Display

1 2 3 4 5

EXT-L COPY

SD USB

HDDSDVD

PLAY

6 7

SD card slot indicator

Remote control signal indicator

This flashes when it is operated by the remote control.

Main display section

Linked timer recordings with external equipment

indicator .................................................... (➔ 62)

USB port indicator

Copying indicator

Disc indicator

This indicator lights up when a disc is inserted.

Current time/playback counter, various messages

Playback indicator

)

Timer recording indicator ( ) ................... (➔ 29

On:

When a timer recording programme is registered.

Flashes:

When the unit cannot record a timer recording programme.

Drive (HDD, DVD or SD) indicator

Select “DVD” for any discs. DVD indicator will light up.

Main Unit

The unit’s display

2^{Remote control}

Disc tray

signal sensor

Pull to

flip down

the front

panel.

4 5

7 89bk

Disc tray open/close button ..........................(➔ 26)

DV IN terminal

Standby/on switch ( /I) .............................(➔ 13)

Press to switch the unit from on to standby mode

or vice versa. In standby mode, the unit is still

consuming a small amount of power.

Recording indicator (“REC1”, “REC2”)

Red indicator light during recording.

REC1, REC2 shows the status of one or twin

recording.

(for a digital video camcorder).....................(➔ 63)

SD card slot ................................................(➔ 118)

USB port.....................................................(➔ 118)

Channel select button.............................(➔ 24, 27)

Start recording button...................................(➔ 27)

Stop button .............................................(➔ 26, 27)

Play/✕1.3 button...........................................(➔ 26)

AV3 input terminals.......................................(➔ 63)

REC indication flash during Recording Pause.

(e.g., when starting Guide LINK recording)

Rear Panel

DIGITAL

AUDIO

OUT

COMPONENT

DEO OUT

DMR XS350EBK

PR000001010

SER NO

DISH

13V/ 18V

350mA max

LAN

10BASE

AV1

COAXIA

(

100BASE TX

DISH

AC IN

OPTICAL

(

AV2 EX

AUDIO

VIDEO

)

PCM/BITST EAM

AV OUT

1 2

5 6

7 8 9 bk

bmbn

Serial number

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT (PROGRESSIVE/

INTERLACE) terminals .........................(➔ 110)

Y = Luminance signal (brightness), P_B= Chrominance signal

(colour difference), P_R= Chrominance signal (colour difference)

AUDIO/VIDEO output terminals ....(➔ 110, 111)

AV4 input terminals

S VIDEO output terminal.......................(➔ 110)

Digital audio output terminal (optical)....(➔ 111)

Digital audio output terminal (coaxial).....(➔ 111)

AC IN~ = Power supply

Connection for the AC mains lead

Cooling fan

Satellite input terminals.....................(➔ 10, 11)

HDMI AV OUT terminal ...................(➔ 10, 109)

Digital audio and video output terminal

LAN terminal.........................................(➔ 112)

AV1 (TV) 21-pin Scart terminal...(➔ 10, 11, 109)

TV set connection

AV2 (EXT) 21-pin Scart terminal...........(➔ 109)

Connection of an external unit

For information about the 21-pin Scart terminal (➔ 109)

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic Connection

This recorder requires 2 signal feeds from a satellite dish to be able to record 2 different channels at the

same time. Please consult with your Panasonic dealer for details of dish installation.

•

Connect both satellite terminals (DISH IN 1 and DISH IN 2) to the satellite dish when you want to record 2

programmes simultaneously or view TV during recording.

Connect DISH IN 1 terminal to the satellite dish when you use only one terminal. (You cannot view if you

connect only DISH IN 2 terminal.) In this case, you cannot record 2 programmes simultaneously or view TV

during recording.

•

Supply power from another device when you use 2 or more devices to receive satellite broadcast, because this

unit does not supply power when it is turned in standby.

•

Before connection, turn off the mains for all connected equipment and read the appropriate operating instructions.

READ THE CAUTION FOR THE AC MAINS LEAD ON PAGE 3 BEFORE CONNECTION.

When your Television has an HDMI input terminal

When connected to an HDMI compatible unit, an uncompressed digital audio and video signal is transmitted,

enabling you to enjoy high quality, digital video and audio with just one cable. When connecting to an HDMI-

compatible HDTV (High Definition Television), the output can be switched to 1080p, 1080i or 720p HD video.

Regarding VIERA Link “HDAVI Control^TM” function

When connecting with a Panasonic TV (VIERA) or a receiver equipped with the “HDAVI Control” function, linked

operations would be possible. [➔ 84, Linked Operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI Control™”/Q Link)]

• Non-HDMI-compliant cables cannot be utilized.

• It is recommended that you use Panasonic’s HDMI cable.

Recommended part number: RP-CDHG10 (1.0 m), RP-CDHG15 (1.5 m), RP-CDHG20 (2.0 m), RP-CDHG30

(3.0 m), RP-CDHG50 (5.0 m), etc.

A When your television does not have a digital satellite tuner

Connecting with a

Panasonic TV (VIERA)

HDMI IN

If the 21-pin Scart cable is

connected, the Direct TV

Recording and Pause Live

TV function is available.

(➔ 37)

DISH IN 1

DISH IN 2

^ꢀTo household

mains socket

HDMI

AV OUT

AV1 (TV)

AC IN

This unit

HDMI cable (not supplied)

21-pin Scart cable (not supplied)

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

When your television has a digital satellite tuner

Connecting with a

Panasonic TV (VIERA)

Satellite

HDMI IN

If the 21-pin Scart cable is

connected, the Direct TV

Recording and Pause Live

TV function is available when

you view other than satellite

programme. (➔ 37)

DISH IN 1

DISH IN 2

^ꢀTo household

mains socket

AV1 (TV)

HDMI

AC IN

AV OUT

This unit

HDMI cable (not supplied)

21-pin Scart cable (not supplied)

^ꢂConnect only after all other connections are complete.

After completing the connections, proceed to the TV Tuning (➔ 13).

• Refer to page 116 if “U50”, “U50 1” or “U50 2” appears on the unit’s display.

HDMI features

• Please use High Speed HDMI Cables that have the HDMI logo (as shown on the cover).

• When outputting 1080p signal, please use the HDMI cables 5.0 meters or less.

• Set “HDMI Video Mode” and “HDMI Audio Output” to “On” (➔ 102). (The default setting is “On”.)

• This unit incorporates HDMI™ (V.1.3a with Deep Colour, x.v. Colour™) technology (➔ 134, 135).

• Video sources converted to 1920 1080 resolution, while of high quality, will exhibit somewhat lower subjective

image resolution than true, native 1080p full-HD sources. See dealer for details.

Notes

• The freesat channel uses Astra 2 at 28.2° East, and Eurobird 1 at 28.5° East satellites. To ensure your satellite

dish is correctly installed please consult your freesat registered dealer.

• If you connect 2 satellite dishes for different satellites (e.g., DISH IN 1: Astra 28.2, DISH IN 2: Astra 19.2), the unit

cannot receive the signal correctly.

• You can use the unit as one tuner when connecting DISH IN 1 to a satellite dish that can receive SKY.

• If connecting to equipment that is only compatible with 2 channel audio output, audio with 3 channels or more will

be down-mixed (➔ 134) and output as 2 channels, even if connecting with an HDMI cable (some discs cannot be

down-mixed).

• For display units compatible with HDCP (High-Band width Digital Content Protection) that are equipped with a

digital DVI input terminal (PC monitors, etc.):

Depending on the unit, picture may not display properly or at all when connecting with a DVI/HDMI switching cable

(audio cannot be output).

• If you connect a DVI device that is not compatible with HDCP, set “HDCP on HDMI Output” in the Setup menu to

“Off” (➔ 102).

Tips

You can check the satellite signal condition using “Signal Condition” in the Setup menu (➔ 96).

When the unit is not to be used for a long time

To save power, unplug it from the household mains socket. This unit consumes a small amount of power,

even when it is turned in standby.

[approx. 0.4 W (“Power Save” is set to “On”)]

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic Connection

When yourTelevision does not have an HDMI input terminal

In this setting, you cannot enjoy HDTV in HD picture quality. The resolution will be 576i/480i.

DISH IN 1

DISH IN 2

^ꢀTo household

AV1 (TV)

AC IN

mains socket

This unit

21-pin Scart cable (not supplied)

^ꢂConnect only after all other connections are complete.

After completing the connections, proceed to the TV Tuning (➔ 13).

• Refer to page 116 if “U50”, “U50 1” or “U50 2” appears on the unit’s display.

Notes

• The freesat channel uses Astra 2 at 28.2° East, and Eurobird 1 at 28.5° East satellites. To ensure your satellite

dish is correctly installed please consult your freesat registered dealer.

• If you connect 2 satellite dishes for different satellites (e.g., DISH IN 1: Astra 28.2, DISH IN 2: Astra 19.2), the unit

cannot receive the signal correctly.

• You can use the unit as one tuner when connecting DISH IN 1 to a satellite dish that can receive SKY.

Tips

• You can check the satellite signal condition using “Signal Condition” in the Setup menu (➔ 96).

• Additional Connections (➔ 109).

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Auto Set Up (freesat)

Search and store TV programmes automatically.

These steps are not necessary if the setup has been completed by your local

dealer or freesat registered dealer.

Preparation:

VOL

DRIVE

• Turn on the television (and connected equipment)

and select the video input terminal that this unit is

connected to.

SELECT

abc

PAGE

def

ghi

jkl

mno

TV’s remote control

qrs

tuv

xyz

MANUAL SKIP

INPUT

DEL

to turn the unit on.

SELECT

SKIP

SLOW/SEARCH

freesat Auto Setup

Auto Setup will start to search for TV

Searching

programmes and store them in the

numbered order as specified by the

broadcasters.

DISH Input 1 Signal Quality

DISH Input 1 Signal Strength

DISH Input 2 Signal Quality

DISH Input 2 Signal Strength

TV Channels Found

STOP

PLAY/x13

EXIT

PAUSE

Radio Channels Found

Data Channels Found

Channels found, creating channel l st

Exit

eesat setup

STATUS

– Check signal quality/strength

displayed on the screen (➔ right). If

the signal is weak, Auto Setup will

not start. Check that the satellite

dish is correctly positioned and

connected.

The bar appears beside

Signal Quality and Signal

Strength when the signal

is input.

Enter Postcode for local channels including space

Postcode

Select

Set character

Select

BACK/

RETURN

OPTION

REC

RETURN

Delete

Confirm

Delete a l

CREATE

TIME SLIP CHAPTER

You now have the opportunity to enter your

details and help the police to crack crime.

See Instruction Book.

Enter your Postcode.

Press [ , , , ] to

e r w q

REC MODE

EXT LINK

Owner ID

DIRECT TV REC

select the character, then

press [OK].

Please enter new PIN

Tips

PIN entry

RETURN

Repeat step

Press the “Green” button to confirm.

Your postcode is required to receive local services and sort the channel order.

To cancel the Auto Setup

Press [BACK/RETURN ].

–

To restart the Auto Setup (➔ 96, freesat

Auto Setup)

Press the numbered buttons to enter your choice

of a 4-digit PIN.

To correct the character

Press the “Red” button to delete character

– This PIN will be used only for the Owner ID-Data Entry screen.

one by one.

You can delete all input characters by

pressing the “Blue” button.

You now have the opportunity to enter your

details and help the police to crack crime.

abc

def

See Instruction Book.

You can perform this operation in step

Owner ID

Please enter new PIN again to confirm

ghi

jkl

tuv

mno

PIN entry

Notes

RETURN

qrs

xyz

• To initialise all settings (➔ 104, Shipping

Condition)

• When the below screen appears after

(continued on the next page)

step

freesat Auto Setup

No satellite signals detected at dish

Please check sh installat on connection before start ng search

playback functions will be lim ted

input

otherwise record

Se ect

chara te

ele

RETURN

This screen appears when this unit does not

detect the connection to DISH IN 2.

When you connect DISH IN 1 only press

[OK], then go to step

When you connect both DISH IN 1 and 2,

turn this unit off and check your

connection. Then perform from step

• The Auto Setup may require a certain

length of time.

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Auto Set Up (freesat)

Enter new PIN.

Repeat step

again to confirm.

to enter PIN

– This PIN will be used for controlling

• DVD-Video playback

Owner ID-Data Entry

• Accessing to the channels you selected in “Child

Lock” (➔ 97)

0000

NAME

• Playback programmes for adults

• Using VIERA CAST

HOUSE NO

POSTCODE

RG12 8FP

Select

Change PIN

– Make a note of PIN in case you forget it.

– The default PIN is “0000”.

RETURN

– The Owner ID-Data Entry screen appears.

– Make a note of PIN in case you forget it.

Press [ , ] to select the number, then press [ ].

e r

– You can also use the numbered buttons.

Enter your NAME.

Repeat step

for enter 4-digit PIN.

Press [ , ] to select “NAME”, then press [OK].

e r

Press [OK] to confirm.

User input

NAME

PIN Entry

)

Remember the PIN.

(

Select

Set characte

Select

RETURN

De ete

Delete a l

Press [ , , , ] to select the character, then

e r w q

press [OK].

Repeat step

Press [BACK/RETURN ] to return to the

Owner ID-Data Entry screen.

Power Save

Off

Function: ,

e r

Enter your HOUSE NO.

On M n mise standby power consumption,

w thout Quick Start function and

AV2 loop through in standby

to select “On”

or “Off”, then

Off With Qu ck Start funct on

Press [ , ] to select “HOUSE NO”, then press

[OK].

e r

and AV2 loop through in standby

RETURN

User input

HOUSE NO

)

– Set to “On” to reduce power consumption in

standby mode.

(

Select

Set character

Select

RETURN

De ete

Delete a l

The features of the power save function when

the unit is in standby mode are as below.

Press [ , , , ] to select the character, then

e r w q

press [OK].

Power Save

Off

Repeat step

Power

consumption

Startup time

Front display

Approx. 0.4 W

Not quick

Turns off

(The clock is not

displayed.)

Approx. 12 W

Quick

Press [BACK/RETURN ] to return to the

Owner ID-Data Entry screen.

Owner ID-Data Entry

Stays lighted

0000

EEEE

NAME

Watching the

picture from

the external

equipment

connected to the

AV2 terminal

ABC

HOUSE NO

POSTCODE

Select

Edit

RG12 8FP

cannot do

can do

RETURN

BACK/

RETURN

to confirm the Owner ID-

Data Entry screen.

PIN Entry

• Auto setup for your unit is complete.You can now make your

favourite channels and store them in the required order in the

favourites (➔ 95).

Enter a new 4 digit PIN, then press OK.

This PIN will be used for controlling viewing and playback.

PIN will be set to “0000” by pressing “RETURN” when there is no

number input.

RETURN

Number

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To set the clock manually

To check the signal condition

Normally this unit obtains time and date information from TV

channels to set its clock and automatically adjusts the time

several times a day.

If the clock is incorrect or cannot be automatically set, perhaps

due to bad signal reception, you will need to adjust the clock

manually.

(➔ 96, Signal Condition)

To tune in other satellite channels

(➔ 16, Tuning in Other Satellite

Services)

• In the case of a power failure, the clock setting remains in

memory for approximately 60 minutes.

To hide unwanted channels

(➔ 96, freesat Channel List)

1. Press [FUNCTION MENU].

2. Press [ , ] to select “Others”, then press [OK].

e r

3. Press [ , ] to select “Setup”, then press [OK].

e r

4. Press [ , ] to select “Others”, then press [OK].

e r

5. Press [ , ] to select “Clock”, then press [OK].

To change PIN (➔ 104, Owner ID)

e r

6. Press [ , ] to select “Off” of “Auto Clock

w q

Setting”.

To correct the character

Press the “Red” button to delete character one by one.

You can delete all input characters by pressing the “Blue” button.

You can perform this operation in step

7. Press [ , ] to select “Manual Setting”, then

e r

press [OK].

8. Press [ , ] to select the item you want to

w q

change.

To display the Owner ID information on TV

Hour

Minute

Second

Day

Month

Year

Press and hold [ ] on the main unit for more than 5 seconds.

The PIN is not displayed.

After 30 seconds this menu automatically disappears.

You cannot change the Owner ID on this screen.

9. Press [ , ] to change the setting.

e r

10.Press [OK] to confirm new date and time and to

initiate the clock.

You can perform this operation after step

Tips

To return to the previous screen

Press [BACK/RETURN ].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

Notes

If a TV station transmits a time setting signal, and when “Auto Clock

Setting” in the Clock setting menu is set to “On”, the automatic time

correction function checks the time and if necessary it is adjusted

several times every day.

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tuning in Other Satellite Services

You can also view or record other free channels (Astra 2 at 28.5 degree east) or free channels from other satellites

that you can receive in your area.

This setup is not required if you are only viewing or recording from freesat channels.

Search and store TV programmes of the other satellite service automatically.

These steps are not necessary if the setup has been completed by your local

dealer or freesat registered dealer.

VOL

DRIVE

SELECT

abc

to turn the unit on.

PAGE

def

ghi

jkl

mno

qrs

tuv

xyz

MANUAL SKIP

e r

to select “Others”, then

to select “Setup”, then

to select “Tuning”, then

INPUT

DEL

SELECT

SKIP

SLOW/SEARCH

e r

Tuning

freesat Favourites Edit

freesat Channel List

freesat Auto Setup

Other Satellite Channel List

Other Satellite Tuning Menu

Signal Condition

STOP

e r

PLAY/x1.3

PAUSE

STATUS

EXIT

Access

Child Lock

Preferred Multi Audio

Preferred Subtitles

RETURN

Other Satellite Tuning Menu

Auto Setup

Manual Tuning

Dish Setup

Access

to select “Other Satellite

e r

Tuning Menu”, then

BACK/

OPTION

REC

RETURN

CREATE

TIME SLIP CHAPTER

RETURN

Other Satellite Auto Setup - Satellite Selection

Satellite Selection

Search Mode

Channel Type

REC MODE EXT LINK

DIRECT TV REC

Astra2/Eurobird

All

to select “Auto Setup”,

e r

then

freesat and other satellite channels

Tips

Select

Start

Change

RETURN

To cancel the Auto Setup

Press [EXIT].

to select the desired satellite.

w q

Notes

• To initialise all settings (➔ 104, Shipping

Condition)

– You can select from a list of following satellites.

• Astra2/Eurobird

Astra1 (The dish will need to be repositioned to receive from these satellites.)

Hotbird (The dish will need to be repositioned to receive from these satellites.)

All (Any satellites that the dish can pick up from its current position.)

•

To tune to other satellites manually (➔ 96)

to select “Search Mode”.

to select the search mode.

w q

– You can select the search mode from the followings.

• All : All channels including encrypted channels will be searched.

• Free channels

to select “Channel Type”.

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

to select the channel type.

w q

– You can select the channel type from the followings.

• All : All channels including TV, Radio, Data, etc. will be searched.

• TV

• Radio

Notes

Other Satellite Auto Setup - Satellite Selection

Astra2/Eurobird

Satellite Selection

to start the Auto

•

When the below screen appears after

step

All

Search Mode

Channel Type

freesat and other satellite channels

Setup

Other satellite Auto Setup

DISH Input 1 - Signal Quality

DISH Input 1 - Signal Strength

No sate lite

Please check dish nstallat on

otherwise record playback function will be lim ted

gnals detected at

nput

connection before starting sea ch

DISH Input 1 - Signal Lock Locked

– Go to step when you

DISH Input 2 - Signal Quality

DISH Input 2 - Signal Strength

ect

Set cha acte

Se ect

RETURN

select “All” in step

DISH Input 2 - Signal Lock Locked

This screen appears when this unit does

not detect the connection to DISH IN 2.

When you connect DISH IN 1 only press

– It takes time. Please follow the

instruction on the screen.

– This unit is checking signals

during displaying “Please wait”.

“Locked” appears when the

checking is finished. Both DISH

Continue

RETURN

[OK], then go to step

The bar appears beside signal Quality

and Signal Strength when the signal is

input.

When you connect both DISH IN 1 and

2, turn this unit off and check your

connection. Then perform from step

Auto Setup can take up to 45 minutes.

•

IN 1 and 2 are checking the signals when both terminals are

connected.

• If “Locked” does not appears, the signal is weak, and Auto Setup

will not start. Check that the satellite dish is correctly positioned

and corrected.

Other Satellite Auto Setup

to continue the

All other satellite tuning data will be erased.

Auto Setup.

Continue

– Ensure that signals to both DISH

IN 1 and 2 are locked before

RETURN

starting scan.

Other Satellite Auto Setup - Satellite Scan

to start the scan.

Satellite Scan

Please wait... This may take up to 45 minutes to complete.

100%

Free TV Channels found

Free Radio Channels found

Data Channels found

– The scan starts.

Pay TV Channels found

RETURN

Other Satellite Auto Setup Select Channels to Remove

1/7

Delete unwanted

channels.

– To delete all channels of each

type on the screen (other than

Free TV), press the “Red”

button. And then press [ ,

to select the channel type you

want to delete, press [OK].

All Channels

Type

Keep

Name

BBC R5L

Radio

ETV2

Free TV

BBC 1 Wales

BBC 2 Wales

BBC 1 Scotland

BBC 2 Scotland

Tips

Free TV

To select the type

Press the “Blue” button in step

Select

Kept Channels:

Available Space: 2957

Found Channels: 42

Each time you press the “Blue” button, the

type will be changed as follows.

All Channels ➔ Free TV ➔ Pay TV ➔ Radio ➔

Data ➔ Unknown ➔ All Channels ➔ …

Remove

Page Up

Page Down

]

e r

RETURN

Multiple delete

Channel type

– To remove the selected channel, press [ , ] to select the channel

you want to remove, press [OK]. The check mark is removed.

To restore all channels

e r

Press the “Red” button, and then press

[

] to select “Restore all channels”,

e r

BACK/

press [OK] in step

RETURN

to confirm deletion.

To restore the channel

Press [ ] to select the channel you

e r

want to restore, press [OK] in step . The

check mark is displayed.

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HDD and Disc Information

This unit can record to HDD and copy to the following recording media.

Internal

DVVDD--RRAM DDVVDD-R

DVVDD--RR DL DDVVDD-RRW

++RRWW

HHDDDD

++RR

++RR DDLL

Recordings can only be made to HDD in DR mode first, with the same quality as broadcasted, then they can be copied to discs.

Instant record

It can only record to HDD by pressing [ REC].

Discs

HDD

REC

Record to the HDD and

then copy to the disc.

Can do

Cannot do

Timer record

It can only record to HDD when using timer recording.

WED 19 08/2009 13:30

TV Gu de:

Landscape

Discs

HDD

Types

Channels

16:00

WED 19th

12:00 20:00 HD BBC HD Preview

Time: 14:00

14:30

15:00

15:30

108 BBC HD

BBC HD Preview

Red Cap

113 ITV2

Red Cap

News Show

ue Wave Great

the

114 ITV2+1

115 ITV3

Love USA

News Show

Record to the HDD and

then copy to the disc.

100 Sheep Dream

Heartbeat

UFO

USO

100 Sheep Dream

Hot Wave

116 ITV3+1

117 ITV4

Used Car

Deal

120 Channel4 Behind me

Black House

Crowntown

Can do

Cannot do

Select Channel

Page Up

Page Down

Sele

RETURN

Info

GUIDE

ogramme

Portrai /Landscape

+24 hours

Prog Type

Channel Genre

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Recording and copying programmes

This unit can record standard or high definition programmes from its built-in satellite tuners onto HDD with the same

quality picture and sound as they are broadcasted.

Goal!

Recording

HDD

Goal!

DR mode

All subtitles and multi audio are recorded (selectable during playback).

All recordings are first made to HDD in DR mode only.

COPY

When copying titles to disc

Discs

XP, SP, LP, EP, FR mode

Only one subtitle and one audio can

be copied.^ꢀ

Copy as standard definition (SD) quality.

Copy in Normal Speed mode.

^ꢀYou cannot switch the subtitle or audio description on or off during playback of the copied title.

Notes

•

Teletext and Digital TEXT (MHEG) cannot be recorded.

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HDD and Disc Handling

HDD and discs you can use for recording and play

(ꢃ: Possible, –: Imposs ble)

Disc type

Hard disk drive (HDD)

HDD

Standard symbol

Data that can be recorded and played

Quality in which video is recorded

Recording mode in which video is recorded^ꢂ

Rewritable

Video/Still picture/Music

High deﬁnition (HD) quality/Standard deﬁnition (SD) quality

DR, HG, HX, HE, HL, XP, SP, LP, EP, FR

ꢃ

Timer recording

Recording copy-restricted programmes on

freesat (➔ 33)

ꢂ

Recording modes that can be selected differ depending on the recording methods. For details, please refer to the respective operating.

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Disc type

DVD-RAM

DVD-R

DVD-R DL

DVD-RW

RAM

-R

DVD-V

-R DL

-RW(V)

Standard symbol

before ﬁnalisation

before

ﬁnalisation

after ﬁnalisation ﬁnalisation

DVD-V

after ﬁnalisation

Data that can be recorded and

played

Video

Still picture

Video

Quality in which video is recorded

Standard deﬁnition (SD) quality

Recording mode in which video is

recorded

XP, SP, LP, EP, FR

ꢃ

Rewritable

–

Timer recording

ꢃ

Copying copy-restricted programmes

on freesat titles (➔ 33)

Copy in standard definition quality (XP, SP, LP, EP, FR mode) is possible.

RAM

Play on other players

can be played ꢁFinalisation is needed for playback on other equipment.

-R DL

can be played back only on equipment compatible with this disc.

back on Panasonic

DVD recorders and

DVD-RAM compatible

DVD players.

ꢁ

Note

When using cartridge

discs with the write

protect tab in the

protect position (➔ 92),

play automatically

starts when inserted in

the unit.

–

Disc type

+R DL

+RW

DVD-V

+R DL

DVD-V

Standard symbol

before ﬁnalisation

after ﬁnalisation

Data that can be recorded and played

Quality in which video is recorded

Video

Standard deﬁnition (SD) quality

Recording mode in which video is

recorded

XP, SP, LP, EP, FR

ꢃ

Rewritable

–

Timer recording

–

ꢃ

Copying copy-restricted programmes

on freesat titles (➔ 33)

Copy in standard definition quality (XP, SP, LP, EP, FR mode) is possible.

+RW

can be played back only

on equipment compatible with

this disc.

Play on other players

ꢁFinalisation is needed for playback on other equipment.

+R DL

ꢁ

can be played back only on equipment compatible with

this disc.

ꢁ

If the disc failed to play on other

equipment, we recommend you

create top menu (➔ 94).

Note

ꢁ+R +R DL These discs recorded with this unit or with another Panasonic DVD Recorder may be

incompatible. However, discs that are ﬁnalised are compat ble and can be played.

ꢁ8X Speed +RW disc is not supported.

Notes

ꢁDiscs recorded on equipment other than this unit may not be used for recording on this unit.

ꢁThis unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes can be recorded

onto the HDD.)

ꢁYou may not be able to record depending on the condition of the discs and you may not be able to play due to the condition of the recording.

■ Regarding 8 cm Disc

This unit cannot record or edit the 8 cm DVD-RAM, DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R DL or +RW.

Only playback or copy to the HDD is possible.

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HDD and Disc Handling

Play-only discs

Standard

symbol

Disc type

Logo

Uses

DVD-Video

High quality movie and music discs

DVD-V

DVD-RW video recorded on another DVD recorder

• By formatting (➔ 93) the disc, you can copy onto it in DVD-Video

format.

• It may be necessary to finalise the disc on the equipment used for

recording.

DVD-RW

(DVD Video

Recording

format)

-RW(VR)

• DVD-R^ꢂand DVD-R DL^ꢂwith video recorded in DivX (➔ 49)

• DVD-R^ꢂand DVD-R DL^ꢂwith music recorded in MP3 (➔ 75)

• DVD-R^ꢂand DVD-R DL^ꢂwith still pictures recorded in JPEG (➔ 68)

DVD-R

DVD-R DL

DivX, MP3,

JPEG

• Recorded audio and music (including CD-R/RW^ꢂ)

You can copy tracks to this unit’s HDD.

• CD-R^ꢂand CD-RW^ꢂwith video recorded in DivX (➔ 49)

• CD-R^ꢂand CD-RW^ꢂwith music recorded in MP3 (➔ 75)

• CD-R^ꢂand CD-RW^ꢂwith still pictures recorded in JPEG (➔ 68)

DivX, MP3,

JPEG

–

Disc

with high

definition

video

(AVCHD)

recorded by

Panasonic’s

video

Following disc can be played.

ꢁDVD-RAM, DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL, +RW

ꢁFinalise (➔ 134) the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R or +R DL with

the same equipment that was used to record.

AVCHD

camera, etc.

ꢂClose the session after recording. Play may be impossible on some discs due to the condition of the recording.

• Operation and sound quality of CDs that do not conform to CD-DA speciﬁcations (copy control CDs, etc.) cannot be guaranteed.

• The producer of the disc can control how discs are played. So you may not always be able to control play as described in these operating

instructions. Read the disc’s instructions carefully.

Types of disc for the type of

connected TV

When you use the discs recorded either PAL or NTSC, or playback a

title recorded on HDD using PAL or NTSC, refer to this table.

( : Possible to view, −: Imposs ble to view)

Discs that cannot be played

• Blu-ray Disc (BD-Video, BD-RE, BD-R)

• 2.6/5.2 GB DVD-RAM, 12 cm

• 3.95/4.7 GB DVD-R for Authoring

• DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL recorded

on another unit and not finalised (➔ 134)

• DVD-Video with a region number other than “2” or

“ALL”

Disc/Titles

recorded on HDD

TV type

Multi-system TV

PAL TV

Yes/No

PAL

NTSC

• DVD-Audio

• HD DVD

PAL

NTSC

^ꢂ1(PAL60)

• DVD-ROM, +R 8 cm, CD-ROM, CDV, CD-G, Photo

CD, CVD, SVCD, SACD, MV-Disc, PD, Video CD, etc.

PAL

−

ꢂ2

NTSC TV

NTSC

^ꢂ1Select “PAL60” in “NTSC Video Output” (➔ 99).

If your television is not equipped to handle PAL 525/60 signals the

picture will not be shown correctly.

^ꢂ2Select “NTSC” in “TV System” (➔ 101).

• When playing back a disc or title recorded on the HDD, ensure

that you match the “TV System” setting to the disc or title (PAL or

NTSC) (➔ 101).

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

USB Memory and Card Handling

USB memories you can use on this unit

USB memories can only be used for playback or copy to HDD or discs.

USB memories which are defined as USB mass storage class, and digital cameras that use PTP protocol:

– USB memories that support USB 1.0/1.1 and USB 2.0 Full Speed/High Speed

• USB memories of up to 128 GB can be used.

• USB memories that support bulk only transfer.

CBI (Control/Bulk/Interrupt) is not supported.

Compat ble USB memories

• Digital Cameras which require additional programme installation when connected to a PC are not supported.

• MTP (Media Transport Protocol) device is not supported.

• A multi-port USB card reader is not supported.

FAT16 and FAT32 file systems are supported.

• UDF/NTFS/exFAT file system is not supported.

• Depending on the sector size, some files may not work.

• Only the first partition on USB memories with multi-partition is supported.

Format

USB

Standard symbol

Data that can be played

DivX, MP3, Still pictures (JPEG)

MP3

• It can be copied to HDD.

Still pictures (JPEG)

• It can be copied to HDD or DVD-RAM.

Data that can be copied

SD Video (MPEG2 format)

HD Video (AVCHD format)

• If a Panasonic’s video camera, etc. with HDD is connected to this unit’s USB port:

–you can copy the SD Video shot with the camera to this unit’s HDD or DVD-RAM. (➔ 67)

–you can copy the HD Video shot with the camera to this unit’s HDD. (➔ 66)

• Despite meeting the conditions mentioned above, there may be USB memories that cannot be used for this unit.

Notes

• This unit’s USB port does not support bus-powered USB device.

Cards usable on this unit

SD cards can be used for playback, copy to HDD or discs or copy from HDD or discs.

• SD Memory Card^ꢂ1(from 8 MB to 2 GB)

• SDHC Memory Card^ꢂ2(from 4 GB to 32 GB)

^ꢂ1Including miniSD Card and microSD Card

Type

^ꢂ2Including miniSDHC Card and microSDHC Card

The card types mentioned above will be referred to as “SD card” in these operating instructions.

Standard symbol

Data that can be

played

Still pictures (JPEG)

HD Video (AVCHD format)

Still pictures (JPEG)

• It can be copied to/from HDD or DVD-RAM.

Data that can be

copied

SD Video (MPEG2 format)

HD Video (AVCHD format)

• SD Video shot with a Panasonic’s video camera, etc. can be copied to the HDD or DVD-RAM. (➔ 67)

• HD Video shot with a Panasonic’s video camera, etc. can be copied to the HDD. (➔ 66)

You can insert directly into the SD card slot.

Instructions

^ꢂ1A miniSD Card and a microSD Card must be used with the adaptor that comes with the card.

^ꢂ2A miniSDHC Card and microSDHC Card must be used with the adaptor that comes with the card.

Suitable SD cards

• When using SD cards 4 GB or larger, only SD cards that display the SDHC logo can be used.

• Usable memory is slightly less than the card capacity.

• Please confirm the latest information on the following website.

http://panasonic.co.jp/pavc/global/cs (This site is in English only.)

• If the SD card is formatted on other equipment, the time necessary for recording may be longer. Also, if the SD card is formatted on a PC,

you may not be able to use it on this unit. In these cases, format the card on this unit (➔ 93, 134).

• This unit is compatible with SD Memory Cards that meet SD Card Specifications FAT12 and FAT16 formats, as well as SDHC Memory

Cards in FAT32 format.

• SDHC Memory Cards used for recording with this unit can only be used with other SDHC Memory Card-compatible equipment. SDHC

Memory Cards cannot be used with equipment that is only compatible with SD Memory Cards.

• We recommend using a Panasonic SD card.

• Keep the SD Card out of reach of children to prevent swallowing.

■ Setting the protection

Switch the write-protect switch to the “LOCK” position.

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Watching Television (freesat)

Selecting a channel with TV Guide

Refer to “TV Guide system (freesat)” (➔ 43) for detailed information.

This unit can receive and record digital satellite channels.

Preparation:

VOL

DRIVE

SELECT

Turn on the television and select the video input terminal that this unit is

connected to.

Important:

This unit has only digital satellite tuners.

abc

PAGE

def

ghi

jkl

mno

qrs

tuv

xyz

to turn the unit on.

MANUAL SKIP

INPUT

DEL

SELECT

SKIP

SLOW/SEARCH

a few times and select “freesat”, then

Channel Genre Selection

STOP

PLAY/x1.3

EXIT

PAUSE

All Channels

Entertainment

News & Sport

Movies

Regional

Favourites

STATUS

Lifestyle

– The Channel Genre Selection

screen appears.

Music

Children

Special Interest

Radio

Shopping

Gaming & Dating

RETURN

WED 19/08/2009 13:30

TV Gu de:

Landscape

Red Cap

All Types

All Channels

WED 19

, , , to select the

desired genre, then

e r w q

12:00 20:00 HD BBC HD Preview

BACK/

Time: 14:00

14:30

15:00

15:30

16:00

OPTION

108 BBC HD

BBC HD Preview

Red Cap

RETURN

113 ITV2

Red Cap

114 ITV2+1

115 ITV3

Love USA

News Show

Blue Wave Great

In the

100 Sheep Dream

Heartbeat

UFO

USO

116 ITV3+1

117 ITV4

100 Sheep Dream

Hot Wave

CREATE

Used Car

Deal

– The TV Guide list appears.

120 Channel4 Behind me

ack House

Crowntown

Select Channel

Page Up

Page Down

Info

GUIDE

lect

ogramme

Portra t/Landscape

24 hours

RETURN

Prog Type

Channel Genre

Tips

Selection Screen

WED 19/08/2009 13:30

to select current

To show Digital TEXT (MHEG) and

subtitles (➔ 89)

e r

View

Millions

Single Timer Rec.

Series Timer Rec.

Delete

programme, then

To select or change Multi Audio/AD

(➔ 88, Multi Audio/AD)

4000 FilmFour

Movie

WED 19/08/2009

13:00 - 15:10

To register the channel to “Favourites”

(➔ 95)

Series Info

RETURN

Notes

• The TV Guide list is not displayed

immediately after initial tuning is done.

• Channel number is indicated on the

unit’s display as an example, “FS151”.

e r

to select “View”, then

Selecting a channel without using TV Guide

To select desired channel

Press [ , CH].

1 2

To directly enter channels

You can also select channels with the numbered buttons.

e. g., “151”: [1] ➔ [5] ➔ [1]

“504”: [5] ➔ [0] ➔ [4]

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Watching Television of the Other Satellite Service

To view or record free channels from other satellite services.

There are no programme guides for these channels. Only the channel list is

available.

Selecting a channel with the channel list

This unit can receive and record digital satellite channels.

VOL

DRIVE

SELECT

Preparation:

Turn on the television and select the video input terminal that this unit is

PAGE

connected to.

Important:

This unit has only digital satellite tuners.

abc

jkl

def

ghi

mno

qrs

tuv

xyz

to turn the unit on.

MANUAL SKIP

INPUT

DEL

SELECT

SKIP

SLOW/SEARCH

a few times and select “Other Sat.”,

then

STOP

PLAY/x1 3

EXIT

PAUSE

All Other Sat Channels

Sorting:123... Type:All Channels

STATUS

freesatHome

freesatSSU

Brit Shorts

HINRG LOWNRG

WELL Class

GROOVE

– The channel list appears.

Select

View

– To display the type of the

selected channel, press the

“Blue” button. Each time you

press the “Blue” button, the

type will be displayed as

follows.

Page Up

Page Down

RETURN

Sorting

Type

BACK/

OPTION

REC

RETURN

CREATE

TIME SLIP CHAPTER

Free TV ➔ Radio ➔ Data ➔ All Channels ➔ Free TV ➔ …

– To sort the channel, press the “Yellow” button.

Each time you press the “Yellow” button the item will be displayed

as follows.

REC MODE EXT LINK

DIRECT TV REC

123 (channel number order) ➔ ABC (channel name order) ➔ …

Tips

To set the channel list (➔ 96, Channel

Settings)

e r

to select the desired channel, then

Notes

Selecting a channel without using the channel list

• There are no programme guide

information in other satellite mode, only

list of channel name is available.

• Channel number is indicated on the

unit’s display as an example, “S1234”.

To select desired channel

Press [ , CH].

1 2

You can perform this operation after step

To directly enter channels

You can also select channels with the numbered buttons.

e. g., “5”:

“88”:

[5] ➔ [OK]

[8] ➔ [8] ➔ [OK]

“1234”: [1] ➔ [2] ➔ [3] ➔ [4]

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Playback

Refer to “Advanced Playback” (➔ 45 to 47) for detailed information.

HDD RAM

-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW DVD-V -RW(VR)

Preparation:

Turn on the television and select the video input terminal that this unit is

connected to.

VOL

DRIVE

SELECT

abc

PAGE

to turn the unit on.

def

ghi

jkl

mno

If you use a disc

OPEN/CLOSE

to open the tray

– Insert a disc (➔ 118) and press [ OPEN/CLOSE] again to close

(Button located on front of the unit).

qrs

tuv

xyz

MANUAL SKIP

;

INPUT

DEL

SELECT

the tray.

SKIP

SLOW/SEARCH

a few times to select the HDD or DVD

drive.

STOP

PLAY/x13

PAUSE

PLAY/x1.3

STATUS

EXIT

Stopping Play

Pausing Play

Press [ ].

–

The stopped position is memorized. – Press again to restart play.

(Resume play function )

ꢂ

BACK/

OPTION

RETURN

^ꢂThis operation may not work

depending on a disc or the

position where it was stopped.

CREATE

TIME SLIP CHAPTER

Menu screens on the TV

Tips

To display Top Menu

DVD-V

1. Press [OPTION].

2. Press [

e r

press [OK].

DVD-V

Generally, menu screens that appear on the TV may be navigated as

follows:

e. g.,

] to select “Top Menu” , then

Notes

DVDTOP MENU

Play

•

DVD-V

Subtitles

Playback starts from the point specified

by the disc.

• Depending on the disc type, playing may

Chapter List

Trailer

automatically start without pressing [

(PLAY).

]

• The unit takes some time to read the

disc before play starts.

• Discs continue to rotate while menus

, , , to select an item, then

You can sometimes use the numbered buttons to select an item.

e r w q

are displayed. Press [ ] when you finish

to preserve the unit’s motor and your

television screen.

• If “ ” appears on the TV, the operation is

prohibited by the unit or disc.

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Recording Television Programmes

HDD

Refer to “Important Notes for Recording” (➔ 33 to 34) and “Advanced Recording” (➔ 35 to 38) for detailed

information on recording.

This operation will only record to HDD in DR mode.

Preparation:

Turn on the television and select the video input terminal that this unit is

connected to.

VOL

DRIVE

SELECT

PAGE

to turn the unit on.

abc

def

ghi

jkl

mno

a few times and select the HDD drive.

qrs

tuv

xyz

a few times and select “freesat” or “Other

Sat.”, then

MANUAL SKIP

INPUT

DEL

SELECT

SKIP

SLOW/SEARCH

STOP

to select desired channel.

PLAY/x1.3

PAUSE

STATUS

EXIT

– To select with the numbered buttons

(➔ 24 for freesat, 25 for other satellite services)

– To record 2 programmes simultaneously. (➔ 36)

to start recording.

– When [ REC] is pressed while a drive other than the HDD is

selected, it will automatically switch to HDD and start the recording.

BACK/

OPTION

RETURN

CREATE

TIME SLIP CHAPTER

Pausing Recording

Stopping Recording

Press [ ].

REC

REC MODE EXT LINK

DIRECT TV REC

– Press again to restart recording.

(The title is not divided.)

TEXT

STTL

DISPLAY PROG/CHECK

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Timer Recording Using the TV Guide (freesat)

HDD

Various function with freesat

This unit has a function that enables timer recordings to be controlled by the

signal sent from the broadcaster. “Guide Link”, “Series recording” (➔ 40), and

“Split Programme” are available.

“Guide Link”

—

If you set a timer recording from the TV Guide, the recording’s

VOL

start and stop times can be controlled by the broadcaster, e.g. delayed start.

DRIVE

SELECT

This is indicated by “Guide Link” in the Timer Recording screen in step

“Series Timer Recording” — You can record all the episodes of a series by

setting just one timer recording (➔ 40).

(➔ 29).

abc

PAGE

“Split Programme” — If a programme is separated into 2 or more parts by

some other programmes e.g. news, this unit pauses recording during the gap.

def

This is indicated by “Split” in the Timer Recording screen in step

(➔ 29).

When setting timer from the 1st split programme, other parts of the programme

will be automatically set and indicated by the timer icon on the TV Guide, but not

shown on the timer recording list.

ghi

jkl

mno

qrs

tuv

xyz

If the signal is not sent correctly, the recording may lack the beginning or

the ending part of the programmes.

MANUAL SKIP

In order to make the timer recording work successfully, we recommend

you set the start time earlier and the end time later by some minutes, up to

a maximum of 10 minutes for Guide Link to function.

INPUT

DEL

SELECT

SKIP

SLOW/SEARCH

e.g. When you set the timer recording for a programme that will start at

10:00 and end at 11:00, set “9:58” and “11:05” in step

(➔ 29).

These functions are available for freesat channels only. Use “Manual timer

STOP

PLAY/x1.3

EXIT

PAUSE

recording” (➔ 39) to timer record Other Sat. channels.

STATUS

This operation will only record to HDD in DR mode.

Preparation:

• Turn on the television and select the video input terminal that this unit is

connected to.

• Turn on this unit.

• Confirm that the clock on the unit’s display is set to the correct time.

BACK/

OPTION

REC

RETURN

a few times and select “freesat”,

CREATE

TIME SLIP CHAPTER

then

EXT LINK

Channel Genre Selection

Tips

All Channels

Entertainment

News & Sport

Movies

Lifestyle

Music

Regional

Favourites

To check programmes for which you

set the timer recording (➔ 41)

– The channel genre selection

screen appears.

Children

Special Interest

Radio

To cancel a timer recording

programming

Shopping

Gaming & Dating

RETURN

WED 19 08/2009 13:30

TV Gu de:

Landscape

Types

Channels

WED 19th

12:00 20:00 HD BBC HD Preview

Time: 14:00

, , , to select the

desired genre, then

e r w q

Timer icon

14:30

15:00

15:30

16:00

108 BBC HD

BBC HD Preview

Red Cap

113 ITV2

Red Cap

News Show

ue Wave Great

the

1. Press [

] to select the

e r w q

114 ITV2+1

115 ITV3

Love USA

News Show

100 Sheep Dream

Heartbeat

UFO

USO

programme (the timer icon is displayed),

then press [OK].

2. While “Delete” is selected, press [OK].

116 ITV3+1

117 ITV4

100 Sheep Dream

Hot Wave

Used Car

Deal

– The TV Guide list appears.

120 Channel4 Beh nd me

Black House

Crowntown

Sele

Channel

Sele ogramme

RETURN

Page Up

Page Down

Info

GUIDE

Portrai /Landscape

+24 hours

3. Press [

[OK].

, ] to select “Yes”, then press

w q

Prog Type

Channel Genre

– The timer icon disappears.

, , , to select the desired programme,

then

e r w q

To cancel a series timer recording

programme (➔ 40, Series recording)

– To jump back 24 hours, press the “Red” button.

You can only jump back to the current date and past information

cannot be viewed.

– To jump ahead 24 hours, press the “Green” button to jump ahead

by one day.

– To display channels sorted in prog. type, press the “Yellow” button.

–

To display channels sorted in channel genre, press the “Blue” button.

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Notes

to select “Single Timer Rec.”, then

e r

• You cannot display the TV Guide when

you select “Other Sat.” on step

• The TV Guide list is not displayed

immediately after initial tuning is done.

• The TV Guide system will not work if

the clock is not set correctly.

• If “NTSC” has been selected for “TV

System” (➔ 101), the TV Guide system

cannot be used.

– If “Series Timer Rec.” can be selected on the Selection Screen, refer

to “Series recording” (➔ 40)

e.g.,^ꢂ

Selection Screen

WED 19/08/2009 13 30

Timer Record ng Remain HDD 30 30 DR

WED 19 08/2009

View

M llions

Channel Day/Date Start

121 WED19 08 13 10

Dr ve

HDD

Mode

Single Timer Rec.

Series Timer Rec.

Delete

13 50

4000 FilmFour

Movie

WED 19/08/2009

13 00 15 10

[P og Name]

Input Name

BBC News at One

BBS

(Gu de Link)

Genre News

Na ional and international news from the BBC fo lowed by Wather

Series nfo

• If you set a timer recording that will

overlap with other timer recordings, the

“Overlapped Timer Recording” screen

appears to help you resolve the

overlapping.

Follow the on-screen instructions.

• TV Guide will disappear automatically

when you do not operate this unit more

than 5 minutes.

RETURN

(Guide Link) : Guide Link (➔28)

(Series) : Series recording (➔ 40) is set.

(Split) : The programme is split in two or more parts by other programmes. This unit

pauses recording during the gap between the parts of the programme.

^ꢂThis screen may not appear depending on the programme.

– The selection screen appears if there are both SD and HD

programmes when you select the programme, go to (➔ below,

Recording the ITV HD, etc. programme)

Confirm the programme (start and end time) by

TV magazine, etc. and correct if necessary using

, , , , then

e r w q

Timer icon

–

The timer icon is displayed when the settings are stored and the timer programme is on.

” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer recording standby has been activated.

“

– Repeat steps

–

to programme other recordings.

– Press [ ] to turn the unit off.

“Guide Link” will not be displayed and will not function under the following conditions.

–Timer programmes set manually (➔ 39).

–Timer programmes set from the TV Guide are modified or start/stop time changed by more

than 10 minutes from original time.

–Timer programmes set from the TV Guide with the start time modified to later time or the

stop time modified to earlier time than the original time.

Recording the ITV HD, etc. programme

When ITV programme is also broadcast, the unit offers to select HD/SD

programme based on the signal sent from the broadcaster.

You can record the ITV HD programme using this unit.

After performing steps

–

to select a programme (➔ 28)

Tips

e r

to select “Single Timer Rec.”, then

To set the series timer recording with

ITV HD programme, etc.

Selection Screen

MON 09 03/2009 22 45

Select “Series Timer Rec.” in step

(➔ 40, Series recording)

View

Little League Champion

Single Timer Rec.

Series Timer Rec.

Delete

103 ITV1 Wales

Sport

TUE 10/03/2009

19 30 22 00

Ser es

RETURN

to select the HD programme for recording,

e r

then

Programme Selection

MON 09/03/2009 22 45

– This screen will only appear if there is an

HD broadcast of the programme.

The same programme

H gh Defin tion picture quality exis

Please choose programme and set the timer recording

Channel

Schedule

10/03 TUE

Contents

Sou hpaws Action from Anf e d of the

ITV1 Wa es 19 30 22 00 second leg of the f rst knock out round

10/03 TUE

Sou hpaws Action from Anf e d of the

19 30 22 00 second leg of the f rst knock out round

RETURN

to go to step (➔ above).

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Copying Titles

HDD

RAM

-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW

Preparation:

• Turn on the television and select the video input terminal that this unit is

connected to.

VOL

RAM

•

If the disc is protected, release protection (➔ 92).

DRIVE

SELECT

abc

PAGE

to turn the unit on.

def

OPEN/CLOSE

ghi

jkl

mno

to open the tray

;

(Button located on front of the unit).

– Insert a disc (➔ 118) and press [ OPEN/CLOSE] again to close

qrs

tuv

xyz

the tray.

e.g.,

MANUAL SKIP

INPUT

DEL

SELECT

DVD-RAM

SKIP

SLOW/SEARCH

Play

Copy

Format Disc

DVD-RAM is inserted.

STOP

PLAY/x1.3

EXIT

PAUSE

RETURN

STATUS

to select “Copy”, then

e r

Copy

Cancel All

Source

HDD

DVD

1 ^{Copy Direction}

HDD DVD

Destination

2 ^{Copy Mode}

VIDEO High Speed

Information of he copy destina ion

DVD RAM

Copy restricted itle can be

copied on to disc

3 ^{Create List}

BACK/

OPTION

Start Copying

RETURN

Select the copy direction.

RETURN

CREATE

TIME SLIP CHAPTER

Set the copy direction.

– If you are not going to change the copy direction, press [ ]

REC

REC MODE EXT LINK

DIRECT TV REC

(➔ step ).

TEXT

STTL

DISPLAY PROG/CHECK

Press [ , ] to select “Copy Direction”, then press [ ].

e r

Press [ , ] to select “Source”, then press [OK].

e r

Press [ , ] to select “HDD”, then press [OK].

e r

If you select “HDD”, “Destination” is automatically set

to “DVD”.

Press [ , ] to select “Destination”, then press [OK].

e r

Press [ , ] to select “DVD”, then press [OK].

e r

The same drive as the copy source cannot be selected.

Press [ ] to conﬁrm.

Set the recording mode.

– If you are not going to change the recording mode, press [ ]

twice (➔ step ).

Press [ , ] to select “Copy Mode”, then press [ ].

e r

Press [ , ] to select “Format”, then press [OK].

e r

Press [ , ] to select “VIDEO”, then press [OK].

e r

Press [ , ] to select “Recording Mode”, then press [OK].

e r

Press [ , ] to select the mode, then press [OK].

e r

Press [ ] to conﬁrm.

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tips

To stop copying

Press and hold [BACK/RETURN ] for 3

– If you are going to copy the registered list without making any

seconds after step . (You cannot stop

change to it , press [ ] twice (➔ step ).

while finalising or creating the top menu.)

Press [ , ] to select “Create List”, then press [ ].

e r

To return to the previous screen

Copy

Press [BACK/RETURN ].

Cancel All

Destination Capacity: 4343MB

(

0% )

Size:

0MB

1 ^{Copy Direction}

To select the subtitle language to copy

No. Size

Title

HDD

DVD

New item (Total=0)

(➔ 97, Preferred Subtitles)

2 ^{Copy Mode}

VIDEO High Speed

3 ^{Create List}

Regarding copy-restriction on freesat

programmes (➔ 33, Important Notes for

Recording)

Start Copying

Page 01/01

RETURN

Create copy list.

OPTION

Copying list icons and functions (➔ 56)

Press [ , ] to select “New item”, then press [OK].

e r

To check the properties of a title and

sort copying list (➔ 60)

Press [ , ] to select the title, then press [ ].

e r

A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all necessary items.

Notes

• Titles in the grouped titles and

other titles cannot be registered

simultaneously.

• Titles recorded using a different

encoding system (PAL or NTSC) from

the TV system currently selected on the

unit cannot be copied.

• The subtitle copied with “Subtitles” set to

“Automatic” cannot be turned on or off

during playback.

• Press [ ] again to cancel.

• The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If you want to specify

the order, repeat selecting one item at a time.

• To show other pages

Press [

u i

Press [OK].

• To edit the copying list (➔ 59)

You cannot start copying when the value of “Size” (➔ 60) exceeds 100%

(“Destination Capacity” is not sufficient).

Press [ ] to conﬁrm.

• During Normal Speed Copy with

“Subtitles” set to “Automatic”, you cannot

turn off the subtitle displayed on the

television.

Set other settings.

– If you are not going to change these settings, press [ ] twice

(➔ step ).

Press [ , ] to select “Other setting”, then press [ ].

e r

“Subtitles”

(Only when copying titles in DR mode and the recording mode other

than High Speed is selected)

Press [ , ] to select “Subtitles”, then press [OK].

e r

Press [ , ] to select “Automatic” or “Off”, then press [OK].

e r

• If “Automatic” is selected

Subtitle in the source titles will be copied.

• If “Off” is selected

Subtitle in the source titles will not be copied.

“Finalise” or “Create Top Menu”

HDD

(

only)

-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW

Press [

e r

] to select “Finalise” or “Create Top Menu”, then press [OK].

Press [ , ] to select “On” or “Off”, then press [OK].

e r

• If “On” is selected

–

After finalising, the discs become play-only and

-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL

you can also play them on other DVD equipment. However, you can no longer

record or edit.

–

Create the Top Menu. Top Menu is a convenient function. We recommend

+RW

you create the menu before playing a +RW disc on other equipment.

“Audio Description”

(Normal Speed Copy only)

Press [ , ] to select “Audio Description”, then press [OK].

e r

Press [ , ] to select “Automatic” or “Off”, then press [OK].

e r

• If “Automatic” is selected

If title recorded in DR mode includes Audio Description, the title will be copied

with Audio Description.

• If “Off” is selected

Title recorded in DR mode will be copied without Audio Description.

Press [ ] to conﬁrm.

e r

to select “Start Copying”, then

to select “Yes”, then

w q

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Deleting Titles

You can delete unnecessary titles.

In order to save HDD capacity, it is recommended that you delete the original

titles (in DR mode) after converting them to other recording modes using “DR

File Conversion” (➔ 53).

Preparation:

VOL

DRIVE

• Turn on the television and select the video input terminal that this unit is

connected to.

SELECT

abc

RAM

•

If the disc is protected, release protection (➔ 92).

PAGE

• Press [ OPEN/CLOSE] and insert a disc. Press [ OPEN/CLOSE]

again to close the tray.

;

def

Important:

ghi

jkl

tuv

mno

Once deleted, contents cannot be recovered.

qrs

xyz

HDD RAM

-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW

MANUAL SKIP

INPUT

DELETE Navigator

DEL

SELECT

SKIP

SLOW/SEARCH

a few times to select the HDD or DVD drive.

STOP

PLAY/x1 3

EXIT

PAUSE

STATUS

FUNCT ON MENU

With the unit stopped

HDD

Time Rema

30 00 DR

Playback

Recording

Delete

Copy

TV Gu de

Others

RETURN

BACK/

OPTION

RETURN

e r

to select “Delete”, then

CREATE

TIME SLIP CHAPTER

DELETE Navigator Grouped Titles

Time Rema ning 45 54 DR VIDEO

Title Name

Bo And Bred Wra hful

FUNCT ON MENU

HDD

P CTURE

MUS C

tles

HDD

Time Rema ning

Date Channel Time

30 00 DR

25 05

12 36

Playback

REC

REC MODE EXT LINK

DIRECT TV REC

01 06 AV2

01 06 AV1

Recording

Delete

Rec t me

00(DR)

Copy

TEXT

STTL

DISPLAY PROG/CHECK

TV Guide

Not

ewed

Others

Page 01/01

Select

CTURE

RETURN

OPTION

DEO

MUS

RETURN

When “VIDEO” is not selected, press the “Red” button to select “VIDEO”.

HDD RAM

To view other pages

Notes

Press [

u i

• You cannot delete while copying at

Normal Speed.

e r

to select the title, then

•

Even if you have set

+R +R DL +RW

protection on other equipment, such

titles are deleted.

A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all necessary items.

• Press [ ] again to cancel.

Tips

To return to the previous screen

Press [BACK/RETURN ].

•

Deleting an item increases

the available disc space by the amount

of space taken by the item deleted.

HDD RAM

to select “Delete”, then

•

Available disc space

does not increase after deletion.

Available disc space

increases when you delete the last title

(If you format the disc, all of the disc

space will be available. (➔ 93)).

-R -R DL +R +R DL

-RW(V) +RW

Delete Titles During Playback

During playback

•

To recover

HDD RAM -RW(V) +RW

DEL

total disc space, the disc needs to be

formatted. (➔ 93, 98)

to select “Delete”, then

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Important Notes for Recording

Recording to HDD

Recording to discs

Recording or timer recording is performed in DR mode using this unit’s tuner.

ꢁRecording or timer recording from external equipment is performed in XP, SP, LP, EP or FR mode.

RAM -R -RW(V) +R +RW

Recording on the discs is performed using “Recording via AV3 input” (➔ 65) and “DV Automatic Recording” (➔ 64).

Recording to DVD-R DL

and +R DL

You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL and +R DL disc on this unit.

Record to the HDD and then copy to the disc.

Recording mode

Recording modes that can be selected differ depending on the recording methods and discs. (➔ 35)

High deﬁnition quality

image

Quality of titles to be recorded differs depending on the recording mode. (➔ 35)

ꢁWhen recording in DR mode

Recorded as high deﬁnition quality.

ꢁWhen converting recording mode to HG, HX, HE, HL from DR

Recorded as high deﬁnition quality with compressed broadcast data.

ꢁWhen copying in XP, SP, LP, EP, FR modes

Recorded as standard deﬁnition quality.

Broadcast in multi-

channel sound

You can select the audio language when receiving audio in multi-channel broadcast using this unit’s tuner [“Multi

Audio” appears at the bottom of digital satellite channel information display (➔ 88)].

ꢁWhen recording in DR mode

All multiple audio are recorded. It is possible to switch audio during the playback of the title.

ꢁWhen converting recording mode to HG, HX, HE, HL from DR/When copying in XP, SP, LP, EP, FR modes

Only one audio is recorded.

Before copying

–“Copy”: Select the audio with “Preferred Multi Audio” in the Setup menu (➔ 97).

–“Copy Title Playing”: Select the audio with “Multi Audio/AD” in the Disc menu (➔ 86).

Programmes with

subtitles

It is possible to display the subtitles when receiving a programme with the subtitles [“Subtitles” appears at the

bottom of digital satellite channel information display (➔ 88)].

ꢁWhen recording in DR mode

Subtitles will be recorded as is. It is possible to switch the subtitles during the playback of the title.

ꢁWhen converting recording mode to HG, HX, HE, HL from DR/When copying in XP, SP, LP, EP, FR modes

Subtitles will be recorded but it is not possible to switch off during playback.

Before copying

–“Copy”: Select the subtitle language in “Preferred Subtitles” in the Setup menu (➔ 97) and set “ Automatic” in

“Subtitles” in the copy setting screen.

–“Copy Title Playing”: Select the subtitle language in “Preferred Subtitles” in the Setup menu (➔ 97) and set

“On” in “Subtitles” in the Disc menu (➔ 86).

Surround audio

You can enjoy surround audio when receiving a programme with surround audio (➔ 35).

ꢁWhen recording in DR mode

It is recorded as is.

ꢁWhen converting recording mode to HG, HX, HE, HL from DR

It is recorded with surround audio that was converted from broadcasted audio format.

ꢁWhen copying in XP, SP, LP, EP, FR modes

It is recorded with stereo audio.

Copy-restriction on

freesat programmes

Some programmes on freesat channels are copy-restricted.

The title may be deleted automatically after the recording mode is converted to HG, HX, HE, HL with “DR File

Conversion” (➔ 53), if the title is copy-restricted.

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Important Notes for Recording

16:9 image such as wide

broadcasting

ꢁWhen “Recording Format for DVD” (➔ 98) in the Setup menu is “Video format”

–Record from external equipment.

–Copy from the ﬁnalised disc (DVD-Video) to the HDD.

-R -R DL -RW(V)

ꢁWhen copying to

ꢁWhen converting the recording mode from DR mode to HG, HX, HE, HL, XP, SP, LP, EP, FR modes

It will be recorded in accordance to the setting of “Aspect for Recording” (➔ 98) in the Setup menu.

ꢁIn the following cases, even when set to “Automatic” or “16:9”, recordings will be made or copied in 4:3.

-R -R DL -RW(V)

–

When the recording mode is set to “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.

–When copying to +R, +R DL and +RW.

DR File Conversion

“DR File Conversion” is a function that converts the titles in DR mode to other recording modes.

In general, Data size of a title will be smaller than the original title after conversion.

You can save HDD capacity by deleting the original title after conversion.

Available disc space

Title DR

Converting to other mode

Title DR

Available disc space

Title HL

Deleting the original data

Available disc space

The original title may be deleted automatically after conversion, if the title is copy-restricted (➔ 33).

High Speed Copy

Speed to copy the title recorded on the HDD to a disc differs depending on the recording mode of the title and

the disc to copy.

Title in XP, SP, LP, EP, or FR modes

RAM

Title can be copied at high speed.

-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW

Title can be copied at high speed if “Recording Format for DVD” was set to “Video format” before the programme

is recorded to HDD from external input. (The default setting is “Video format”. ➔ 98)

But in the following cases, high speed mode does not work.

+R +R DL +RW

-R -R DL -RW(V)

–

Titles recorded in “EP” mode and “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode

Titles recorded in 16:9 aspect

Titles recorded in 16:9 aspect using “EP” mode or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode

-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL

Playing the disc on

other players

The disc must be ﬁnalised. (➔ 94)

It is necessary to ﬁnalise DVD-R, etc. on this unit after recording or copying titles to them.You can then play them

as a commercially sold DVD-Video. However, the discs become play-only and you can no longer record or copy.^ꢂ

ꢂ

You can record and copy again if you format DVD-RW. (➔ 93)

Play on other DVD equipment

Record to DVD-R, etc.

Finalise

+RW

If the disc failed to play on other equipment, we recommend you create top menu (➔ 94).

Parental Control

Programmes with scenes unsuitable for children are broadcasted with “Guidance Information”, which allows you

block the playback of the recorded titles.

If “Parental Control” in the Setup menu is set to “On”, the titles recorded from the programme broadcasted with

“Guidance Information” in the night (21:00–05:30) are indicated in DIRECT NAVIGATOR, DELETE Navigator and

copy source selection screen with the

icon.You will have to enter the PIN (➔ 14, step ).

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced Recording

Recording modes

This explains about recording and copying.

Recording modes that can be selected differ depending on the recording methods and discs.

Flexible Recording

Mode

Recording mode

Features

HG, HX, HE, HL

XP, SP, LP, EP

Record with the same

quality of the broadcast

Record high deﬁnition

programme as

Record in quality as in

conventional analogue

broadcast

Record in quality as in

conventional analogue

broadcast

Record by automatically

adjusting the quality

between XP and EP

(8 hours) depending on the

remaining area on the disc

compressed^ꢂHigh

Deﬁnition data

ꢂ

MPEG-4 AVC/H.264

encoding

Quality that can Quality same as

Quality produced by

conversion of broadcast

data (HD quality and SD

quality)

SD quality only

be recorded

broadcasted

(HD quality and SD

quality)

Multiple audio

Subtitles

Record all multiple audio

Can be recorded

Record only one audio (➔ 33)

Can be recorded ^ꢂ1(➔ 33)

The audio of the Surround audio as the

Surround audio produced Stereo audio

by conversion of

surround

broadcast

programme

broadcast audio format ^ꢂ2

^ꢂ1The subtitles cannot be switched on or off during playback.

^ꢂ2If the audio sampling frequency is not 48 kHz, surround audio is mixed and recorded in front LR channels. Audio will be output from two front

speakers only, even if you play it on 5.1 ch speaker connection.

■ Recording method

(ꢃ:Poss ble, –:Imposs ble)

-R

-RW(V)

+RW

-R DL

+R DL

HDD

RAM

Recording method

(DR)

ꢃ^ꢂ1

–

(HG, HX, HE, HL)

–

ꢃ^ꢂ2

Recording

(XP, SP, LP, EP)

(FR)

–

(DR)

ꢃ^ꢂ1

–

ꢃ

–

ꢃ

–

ꢃ

–

(HG, HX, HE, HL)

(XP, SP, LP, EP)

(FR)

–

Timer Recording

ꢃ^ꢂ2

–

(DR)

(HG, HX, HE, HL)

(XP, SP, LP, EP)

(FR)

–

Flexible Recording via

AV Input

–

ꢃ

(DR)

–

ꢃ

(HG, HX, HE, HL)

(XP, SP, LP, EP)

(FR)

Recording via AV3 input

(DR)

–

(HG, HX, HE, HL)

(XP, SP, LP, EP)

(FR)

DV Automatic

Recording

ꢃ

–

^ꢂ1When using this unit’s tuner

^ꢂ2When recording from external equipment

■ Maximum number of titles that can be recorded

HDD

ꢁYou can record up to 499 titles on HDD. (When continuously recording for long durations, titles are automatically divided every 8 hours.)

RAM -R -R DL -RW(V)

ꢁYou can record up to 99 titles on one disc.

+R +R DL +RW

ꢁYou can record up to 49 titles on one disc.

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced Recording

■ FR (Flexible Recording Mode)

You can set FR (Flexible Recording) mode when copying or recording from external equipment. The unit automatically selects a recording rate

between XP and EP (8 Hours) that will enable the recordings to ﬁt in the remaining disc space with the best possible recording quality.

For example with a 90 minute recording to an unused DVD-RAM, the picture quality is adjusted to between “XP” and “SP”.

ꢁWhen recording to the HDD, picture quality is automatically adjusted to ﬁt a copied title on a 4.7 GB disc.

■ Recording modes and approximate recording time

Depending on the content being recorded, the recording time may become shorter than indicated.

(The time provided on this chart are an estimate.)

Recording Mode

HDD

(250 GB)

DVD-RAM

DVD-R

DVD-RW

DVD-R DL

+R DL

(8.5 GB)

Single-sided

Double-sided^ꢂ2

(9.4 GB)

(4.7 GB)

+RW

(4.7 GB)

DR^ꢂ1

(High Deﬁnition

Quality: 14 Mbps)

37 hours

30 min.

–

DR^ꢂ1

(Standard Deﬁnition

Quality: 5 Mbps)

105 hours

40 hours

60 hours

90 hours

120 hours

55 hours

110 hours

221 hours

–

1 hour

2 hours

4 hours

2 hours

4 hours

8 hours

1 hour

2 hours

4 hours

1 hour 45 min.

3 hours 35 min.

7 hours 10 min.

EP^ꢂ3

441 hours

8 hours

16 hours

8 hours

14 hours 20 min.

(331 hours^ꢂ4)

(6 hours^ꢂ4)

(12 hours^ꢂ4)

(6 hours^ꢂ4)

(10 hours 45 min.^ꢂ4)

^ꢂ1Recording time of DR mode depends on bit rate of broadcasting.

^ꢂ2It is not possible to record or play continuously from one side of a double sided disc to the other.

^ꢂ3When recording to the HDD in “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode, you cannot perform high-speed copy to +R, +R DL or +RW discs.

ꢂ4

When “Recording time in EP mode” is set to “6 hours” in the Setup menu (➔ 98). The sound quality is better when using “6 hours” than when using “8 hours”.

RAM

ꢁ

When recording to DVD-RAM using “8 hours” mode, play may not be poss ble on DVD players that are compatible with DVD-RAM. Use

“6 hours” mode if playback may be on other equipment.

■ Regarding recording time remaining

DR mode recording

Remaining time in the DR mode is calculated with a bit rate of approx. 14 Mbps. But the bit rate differs depending on the broadcast, so the

displayed remaining time might be different from the actual remaining time.

Other recording modes (title conversion or from external input)

This unit records using a VBR (Variable bit rate) data compression system to vary recorded data segments to match video data segments which

may cause differences in the displayed amount of time and space remaining for recording.

If the remaining amount of time is insufﬁcient, delete any unwanted titles to create enough space before you start recording.

2 programmes simultaneous recording

It is possible to record 2 programmes simultaneously, if both DISH IN 1 and DISH IN 2 terminals are connected to the satellite dish (➔ 10, Basic Connection).

Possible combination for 2 programmes simultaneous recording

Digital broadcast

(DR mode)

To record both programmes

to the HDD

(DR mode)

and

or external input

HDD

To perform 2 programmes simultaneous recording, 1 programme out of the 2 needs to be recorded to the HDD in DR mode.

Notes

2 programmes simultaneous recording is not possible in following conditions:

–2 programmes from the external input

–While recording from DV input, or executing “Recording via AV3 input”

–While high speed copying

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Specifying the Recording Time

Playing while you are recording

This operation will only record from the tuner to

HDD in DR mode.

Chasing Playback

Allows playback from the beginning of the title you are

This function allows specifying the length of recording

recording.

time up to 4 hours.

Simultaneous Record and Playback

Allows playback of a previous title, while recording

something else.

• You can also change the drive and play while

recording. Press [DRIVE SELECT].

During recording

on the main unit repeatedly

until the desired time is reached.

– The recording time and the unit’s display change

as follows:

During recording

Counter (Cancel) OFF 0:30 OFF 1:00

OFF 4:00

OFF 1:30

OFF 3:00 OFF 2:00

to select the title to play,

e r

Notes

then

• This function does not work during timer recording.

• Recording stops and the set time is cleared if you press [ ].

• The unit turns off automatically after recording finished.

• When recording from external equipment, you can select the

recording mode from XP, SP, LP, EP. (➔ 63)

Tips

To stop play

Press [ ].

Direct TV Recording

This operation will only record to HDD in DR mode.

This function allows you to immediately start recording

the programme that you are viewing on the TV without

having to change the channels on this unit.

• You can use the function when you connect the unit

to a Q Link compatible TV using the 21-pin Scart

cable.

(When recording using the TV’s tuner, you can select

the recording mode from XP, SP, LP, EP.)

You can also use this function using VIERA Link. (➔

84)

To exit the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

To stop recording

After play stops

1. Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] to exit the screen.

2. Press [ ].

Notes

• “Chasing Playback” and “Simultaneous Record and Playback”

can only be used with programmes of the same encoding system

(PAL/NTSC).

• Depending on the state of the unit, playback may not be possible.

(➔ 113)

and hold for about 1 second.

Tips

To stop recording

Press [ ].

Notes

• If you switch TV channels while using Direct TV recording during

viewing the analogue or digital terrestrial broadcasting, the Direct

TV recording stops.

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced Recording

Operation during Recording

To check the recording programme

Press [STATUS ].

e.g., while 2 programmes simultaneous recording

Recording programme

displayed on the TV screen

HDD

REC1

108 BBC HD

Recording programme not

displayed on the TV screen

002 BBC TV REC2

To display the recording programme on the

TV screen

It is necessary to display the recording programme onto the TV

screen to perform operations such as pause.

ꢁIf the input was switched:

ꢁIf the channel was switched: Press [

Press [INPUT SELECT].

CH].

1 2

To stop recording

It is necessary to display the programme you want to stop on the TV

screen. (➔ above)

Press [ ].

ꢁFrom the start to the end of the recording is called one title.

To pause recording

It is necessary to display the programme you want to pause on the

TV screen. (➔ above)

Press [ ].

ꢁPress again to restart recording.

You can also press [ REC] to restart.

(Title is not split into separate titles.)

ꢁWhen recording is paused, the record indicator ﬂashes.

To switch the input

Press [INPUT SELECT].

To switch to other channels

Press [

CH].

1 2

Perform 2 programmes simultaneous recording

Record other programme with steps

–

on page 27.

“REC1” and “REC2” will light.

REC1

REC2

ꢁChannel switch / input switch while performing 2 programme

simultaneous recording will switch between the 2 recording

programmes.

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced Timer Recording

HDD

Manual timer recordings

This operation will only record from the tuner to

HDD in DR mode.

– The timer icon is displayed in left column.

Preparation:

Timer icon

• Turn on the television and select the video input

terminal that this unit is connected to.

• Confirm that the clock on the unit’s display is set

to the correct time.

– “ ” lights on the unit’s display to indicate

timer recording standby has been activated.

– Check for available space on HDD, etc., when

“!” is displayed.

Timer Recording Remain HDD

Channel Name

30:30 DR

Schedule

WED 19 08/2009 21:30

Drive/Mode Space

New Timer Programme

ode

Space

– Repeat steps

recordings.

–

to programme other

RETURN

To al 0/32

Turn Timer Off

Info

Resolve over ap

Page UP

Page Down

DEL Dele

– Press [ ] to turn the unit off.

to select “New Timer

e r

Programme”, then

Notes

• “ ” on the unit’s display flashes when the unit cannot go to timer

• If “New Timer Programme” is already selected,

press [OK].

recording standby (e.g., HDD has no space to record).

• If three timer recording times overlap, the first and second

recordings always have priority. The third recording will start only

after the first recording has finished.

to move through the items

w q

and , to set the items.

e r

Tips

T mer Recording Remain HDD 30:30 DR

WED 19 08/2009 8:59

Channels

Channel Day/Date Start

121 WED 19 08 13:10

To exit the timer recording list

Press [PROG/CHECK].

Stop

Drive

HDD

Mode

[Prog Name]

Input Name

BBC News at One

BBS 1 CI

• “Date” Setting

Each press of [ ] changes items in the order below.

(Each press of [ ] changes items in the reverse order.)

Category/AV

RETURN

Current date

One month later

minus one day

---

Each press of the “Green” button changes item in the order below.

You can perform this operation when you select a box of

“Day/Date”.

Channel:

– The Channel number

You can press the “Red” button to

change “Category/AV”.

You can perform this operation when

you select a box of “Channel”.

[e.g., All Channels, Radio,

Registered Favourites, AV1, AV2 etc.

(➔ 95, freesat Favourites Edit)]

Date

Weekly

Titles recorded using the same daily or weekly timer are bundled

and displayed as a “group” in the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen

(➔ 45) except when using Auto Renewal Recording (➔ 41).

• You can also use the numbered buttons to enter “Channel”, “Start”

and “Stop”.

Day/Date:

– You can set date or weekly

programme (➔ right, Tips).

Start (start time) / Stop (end time):

– Hold [ ] or [ ] to change in 15-

minute increments or decrements.

HDD (You cannot change the drive.)

Drive:

Mode:

–

– DR mode (You cannot change the

recording mode.) (➔ 35)

• You can change it only when you

select AV1, AV2, AV3 or AV4 in

“Channel”.

Renew:

– Auto Renewal Recording (➔ 41)

ON/OFF

• You can change its setting only

when you select weekly programme

in “Day/Date”.

Input Name – You can enter programme name.

Press [OK]. (➔ 82, Entering Text)

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced Timer Recording

HDD

Series recording

This operation will only record to HDD in DR mode.

You can record all the episodes of a series by setting

just one timer recording using the TV Guide system.

–

You cannot change Channel, Day/Date, Drive,

and “Input Name”.

With “Start” and “Stop” automatically set by the

“Guide Link” function, “Start” can be changed

back by up to 10 minutes and “Stop” can be

changed forward by up to 10 minutes.

a few times and select

“freesat”, then

– This unit automatically records the

programmes that are identified to be of the

same series by the TV Guide data.

– Titles recorded using series recording are

bundled and displayed as a “group” in the

Direct Navigator screen (➔ 45) except when

using Auto Renewal Recording. (➔ 41)

–

The channel genre selection screen appears.

, , , to select the desired

e r w q

genre, then

–

The TV Guide list appears.

Channel Genre Selection

All Channels

Entertainment

News & Sport

Movies

Regional

Favourites

Series recording icon

Lifestyle

Music

Children

Tips

Special Interest

Radio

Shopping

Gaming & Dating

To check the schedule of the series

Press the “Blue” button after performing steps

–

RETURN

Series Information

WED 19/08/2009 23:28

Channel Schedule

Contents

BBC HD

16/03MON

23 00 0:00

2/6 Comedy drama series about

housemates who are actually awere

, , , to select the desired

e r w q

17/03TUE

3/6 Comedy drama series about

housemates who are actually awere

BBC HD 23 00 0:00

BBC HD

3/6 Comedy drama series about

housemates who are actually awere

18/03WED

23 00 0:00

programme, then

WED 19/08/2009 13:30

TV Guide:

Landscape

Types

All Channe

WED 19th

12:00 20:00 HD BBC HD Preview

Time: 14:00

14:30

15 00

15:30

16:00

108 BBC HD

BBC HD Prev ew

Red Cap

RETURN

113 TV2

Red Cap

News Show

ue Wave Great

the

114 TV2+1

115 TV3

Love USA

News Show

100 Sheep Dream

Heartbeat

UFO

USO

100 Sheep Dream

Hot Wave

116 TV3+1

117 TV4

Used Car

Deal

S : The episode to be recorded

120 Channel4 Behind me

Black House

Crowntown

Sele

Channel

Select

RETURN

Page Up

Page Down

Info

GU DE

: Repeat programme

ogramme

Po trai /Landscape

+24 hours

og Type

Channel Genre

: Programme for which you set the timer recording

to select “Series Timer

e r

: HD programme

Rec.”, then

To cancel the series timer recording programme

1. Press [ ] to select the programme (the timer icon is

e r w q

displayed), then press [OK].

2. While “Delete” is selected, press [OK].

– If the same episode has already been set for

series timer recording at a different time or on

another channel, “Series Timer Rec.” will not

be selectable.

3. Press [

] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].

w q

– The timer icon disappears.

• All programmes of the same series you select to cancel will be

cancelled at the same time.

– You can select the HD programme for

recording when there are both SD and HD

programmes.

Notes

• If the unit cannot record the first run, the unit will record the repeat

programme if it is available. However, this unit will not record the

repeat programme, if any part of the first run is recorded.

• The series recording will be cancelled if there has been no episode

of the series for 13 weeks.

[➔ 29 Timer Recording Using the TV Guide

(freesat)]

e.g.,^ꢂ

Selection Screen

WED 19/08/2009 12:42

Timer Record ng Rema

HDD 60:19 DR

WED 19/08/2009 12:42

Channel Day/Da e

Start S op Drive Mode Renew

20 50 HDD DR OFF

View

Single Timer Rec.

Series Timer Rec.

Media Revo ut on

• You cannot set series timer recording for the repeat programmes of

the series that you have already set series timer recording.

102

WED 19/08

102 BBC TWO Wales

News and Factual

WED 19 08/09

0:20 0:50

Input Name

(Gu de Link) (Series)

[Prog Name] Media Revolu ion

Delete

BBC TWO Wa es

Genre News

Tommo row s TV The final episode of Med a Revo u ion

Money Prog amme looks at he transfo mat on of he UK TV indus ry [S]

hree part series the

Series Info

RETURN

ꢂ

The series timer recording cannot be selected if

the selection screen does not appear.

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Check, Change, Delete Programmes, or

Resolve Overlapping

To cancel a timer recording in progress

Select the programme you want to cancel in advance when you

record 2 programmes simultaneously.

The timer recording list can be viewed even when the

unit is off.

While the unit is on

, then e, r to select the

– Confirmation screen appears.

programme.

Icons

to select “Yes”, then

Tim r Recording Remain

Channel Name

30:30 DR

Schedule

WED 19/0 2009 21:30

Drive/Mo

Space

08 BBC HD

he Maharajas’ Motor C r:

MON 09/03

22:00 23:00

HDD

Notes

03 ITV1 Wales

arry Hill’s TV Burp

MON 09/03

23:05 23:35

HDD

02 BBC TWO Wales

rogramme Name

MON 09/03

23:15 23:30

HDD

Recording stops and the timer programme is deleted. (Daily, weekly

and series timer programmes remain and timer recording will start

from the next time the timer recording is set.)

02 BBC TWO Wales

Media Revolution

MON 09/03

23:20 23:50

HDD

New imer Programme

RETURN

Total 4/32

Turn Timer Off

Info

DEL Delete

Resolve overlap

Page UP

Auto Renewal Recording

Page Down

This operation will only record to HDD in DR mode.

If you record a programme onto HDD repeatedly

everyday or every week using timer recording, the unit

will record the new programme over the old one.

This function can be used only when daily, weekly

or series timer recording is selected.

Icons

Red:Timer recording standby is activated.

Grey:Timer recording standby is not activated.

Currently recording

You stopped a daily, weekly or series timer recording.

The icon disappears when the next timer recording starts

recording.

Timer programmes set to Auto Renewal Recording (➔

left).

Drive:

OK:

Recording drive is set to HDD

Recordable

➔

(Date): For daily, weekly or series timer recordings, the display

will show until when recordings can be made (up to one

month ahead from the present time) based on the time

remaining on the HDD.

to select the programme,

e r

then

It may not be possible to record because:

–there is no more space left.

w q

to select “Renew” column.

to select “ON”, then

–

the number of possible titles has reached its maximum.

–programmes are overlapped.

e r

–you stopped a daily, weekly or series timer recording.

Programmes are overlapped. Recording of the

programme with the later start time starts when the

earlier programme finishes recording.

freesat programme is selected

Timer Recording Remain HDD 30:30 DR

WED19 08/2009 8:59

Weekly

Channel Day/Date Start

21 WED 19/18 13:10

Stop

Drive

HDD

Mode

Renew

13:50

[Prog Name]

Input Name

BBC News at One

BBS 1 CI

Other Sat. programme is selected

Guide Link (➔ 28)

Sprit Programme (➔ 28)

RETURN

Series Timer Recording (➔ 28)

DEL

Notes

to delete.

• If a programme set for Auto Renewal Recording is protected

or while playback is taking place from the HDD, or while

copying, the programme will not be overwritten. Instead the

programme set for recording will be saved as a separate

programme, and this programme will be the one to be

overwritten when the next Auto Renewal Recording takes

place.

–

You cannot delete programmes that are

currently being recorded.

to modify the programme.

, , , to make changes,

e r w q

• When there is not enough space on the HDD, the

programme may not be recorded completely.

then

When a programme with is selected

If the “Overlapped Timer Recording”

screen appears

then follow the on-screen

(Green)

instructions to resolve overlapping.

–

If you set a timer recording that will overlap with other

timer recordings using the TV Guide system, the

“Overlapped Timer Recording” screen appears to help

you eliminate the overlapping.

If the on-screen instructions do not appear,

change or delete the overlapped programme.

Follow the on-screen instructions.

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced Timer Recording

HDD

Tips

Notes on timer recording

• You can enter up to 32 programmes a month in advance.

(Each daily, weekly or series timer recording is counted as one

programme.)

• Timer recording will not be performed if the clock is not set.

• During recording, timer recording standby or EXT LINK

standby, this unit cannot play discs or titles that do not

match the “TV System” setting. It is recommended “TV

System” be set to match the discs or title before playing

them. But to prevent the failure of the timer recording,

change back the settings before the recording starts. (➔

101)

To exit the timer recording list

Press [PROG/CHECK].

Notes

•

Recording may fail if there are changes to the station’s programming.

• “ ” disappears from the unit’s display when no timer programme is

• Timer recordings are activated regardless of whether the

unit is turned on/in standby.

• Timer recordings begin when the set time is reached even

when playing.

• Timer recordings do not begin while copying in normal

speed mode.

• If the unit is turned on when timer recording begins, it

remains turned on after recording finishes. It does not

turn off automatically.You can turn the unit off during timer

recording.

set or when all timer programmes are deactivated.

• “-------” is displayed on a series recording item if there will be no

episode of the series for the next 8 days. We recommend you

delete the “-------” item after you confirm the last episode of the

series is recorded.

• The “Guide Link” function may not work if you manually change the

start/end time by over 10 minutes.

• The “Guide Link” function may not work if you manually change the

start time later or the stop time earlier than the original time.

• Programmes that failed to record are deleted from the timer

recording list at 4 a.m. two days later.

• When you programme successive timer recordings to start

immediately one after the other, the unit cannot record the

part at the beginning of the later programmes.

To deactivate timer programme

(e.g. to interrupt a daily or weekly timer

programming)

Programme

Not recorded

Recorded

After performing step (➔ Previous page)

• The “Overlapped Timer Recording” screen may be displayed

immediately after you turn on this unit, if new overlapping

occurred. Refer to “Check, Change, Delete Programmes, or

Resolve Overlapping” (➔ 41).

(Red)

– “ ” on the timer recording list turns gray.

– Press the “Red” button again to activate timer

programme.

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TV Guide system (freesat)

What is the TV Guide system?

The TV Guide system gives you an overview of digital satellite television and radio programmes up to 7 days in

advance. For many of these programmes, you can select additional information provided by the stations.You can

search the programme preview according to various topics such as sport, films etc., according to categories such

as TV or radio.You can easily find the desired programmes and set timer recording.

Landscape view

Landscape view:

The TV Guide system offers detailed

information as if you see a TV programme

magazine. This is convenient to check the

status of timer recording.

WED 19/08/2009 13:30

TV Guide:

Landscape

Broadcast date

Broadcast time

Types

Channels

WED 19th

12:00 20:00 HD BBC HD Preview

Time: 14:00

14:30

15:00

15:30

16:00

108 BBC HD

BBC HD Preview

Red Cap

113 ITV2

Red Cap

News Show

114 ITV2+1

115 ITV3

Love USA

News Show

Portrait view:

100 Sheep Dream

Hear beat

UFO

USO

Blue Wave Great

In the

116 ITV3+1

117 ITV4

100 Sheep Dream

Hot Wave

This is convenient to narrow down channels

to search for the programme you want to

watch.

Used Car

Crowntown Deal

120 Channel4 Behind me

Black House

Select Ch nnel

Page Up

Page Down

Info

GUIDE

Select Programme

RETURN

Portra t/Lan cape

+24 hours

Prog Type

Channel Genre

To switch between Landscape view and

Portrait view

Press [GUIDE].

Series icon

Selected

programme

(ꢀ 40)

Timer icon

(ꢀ 29, 39)

WED 19/08/2009 13:00

All Channels

TV Guide:

Portrait

All Types

TUE 10th

113 ITV2

114 ITV2+1 115 ITV3 116 ITV3+1 117 ITV4

Jack Osbourne Celebrity Adrenaline

Sex, Love &nSecrets

Teleshopping

Coronation Street

Emmerdate

The Montel Williams Shoe

55 2 50

50 3 30

30 6 00

00 6 30

30 7 00

00 7 30

30 8 15

Timer Recording

Series Recording

S :

Select Prog amme

Page Up

Page Down

Info

Select Channel

GU DE

Portrait Landscape

RETURN

24 hours

+24 hours

Prog Type

Channel Genre

Portrait view

Tips

Using the TV Guide list

When displays the empty TV Guide list:

WED 19/08/2009 13:00

To change channels Landscape view

TV Guide:

Portrait

All Types

All Channels

TUE 10th

113 ITV2

Press [

] to select a channel.

e r

Portrait view

Press [ ] to select a channel.

114 ITV2+1 115 ITV3 116 ITV3+1 117 ITV4

Jack Osbourne Celebrity Adrenaline

Sex, Love &nSecrets

55 2 50

50 3 30

30 6 00

w q

The “empty” ﬁeld

00 6 30

Coronation Street

Emmerdate

30 7 00

The TV Guide list appears for this channel.

00 7 30

30 8 15

The Montel Williams Shoe

To view a

programme list for

another day

• Jump ahead 24 hours

Press the “Green” button to jump ahead

by one day.

Select Progr mme

Page Up

Page Down

Info

Select Channel

RETURN

GU DE

Port

t/Landscape

24 hours

+24 hours

Prog Type

Channel Genre

• Jump back 24 hours

• Some digital broadcast may not send programme information.

• Set the timer recording manually (➔ 39, Manual timer recordings).

Press the “Red” button.

You can only jump back to the current

date. Past information cannot be viewed.

To change the page

of the TV Guide list

Press [

1 2

CH].

To see programme

information

(programme name,

programme duration,

broadcast time,

description)

Press [STATUS ].

WED 19/08 2009 13 00

TV Gu de

Po trait

TUE 10 March 2009

Jack Osbourne Celebri

ITV2

Adrenaline

50 55 min

Genre Enter ainment

Junkie Lack Osbourne Bez Charlie

ooks and Jody Latham perform

ter ifying

leap from one cable car to another in the Alps and take on Europe’s most

dangerous motor recing circuit

RETURN

Retu

ist

(Programmes with the

symbol)

Page Down

• Press [ ] and [ ] to scroll up and down.

To show other pages

Press [ CH] (Previous) or [ CH] (Next).

To return to the TV Guide list

Press [STATUS ].

To return to the

previous screen

Press [BACK/RETURN ].

Press [EXIT].

To exit the screen

Notes

• The TV Guide system setup will not work if the clock is not set

correctly or the wrong postcode is selected.

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TV Guide system (freesat)

Selecting the programme from the desired

channel genre or programme type

– A list appears with all programmes of the

selected item.

– When you select the landscape view, the

programmes that belong to the selected

channel genre are highlighted.

This function lets you display a TV Guide list sorted by

genre (e.g. All Channels, Radio) or programme type

(e.g. Movies, Sport).

WED 19/08/2009 23:32

TV Guide:Landscape

e.g., Channel

Genre,

a few times to select

“freesat”, then

All Channels

Lifestyle

MON 9th

23:30 0:00

The Wedding Planner

Time: 23:30 0:00

0:30

1:00

1:30

402 WEDDING

403 WEDDING

406 info TV

450 M and M

451 Audi

The Wedding Getting better

Help! I Need Date Me Mar

“Lifestyle”

is selected

in step of

Landscape

view.

Love Real Weddin The Wedding For Better or For Worse

PokerHeaven PokerHeaven com Europea Red Cap

Fre Police 10/7 Police 10/7 Freddie Starr Soldier, Soldier

The Science The Science Your Audi:T

The

Beh

How

Channel Genre Selection

All Channels

Entertainment

News & Sport

Movies

Regional

Favourites

Select Channel

Info

Select

RETURN

og amme

GUIDE Portrait/Landscape

+24 Hours

Prog. Type

Channel Genre

Lifestyle

Music

Children

Special Interest

Radio

Shopping

, , , to select the desired

programme.

e r w q

Gaming & Dating

RETURN

➔

– To view the programme. ( 24)

, , , to select the desired

e r w q

➔

– To record the programme. ( 28)

genre, then

Tips

– The TV Guide list appears.

WED 19/08/2009 13:30

TV Guide:

Landscape

To display the programme type

Press the “Yellow” button in step

All Types

Channe

WED 19th

12:00 20:00 HD BBC HD Prev ew

me: 14:00 14:30

15:00

15:30

16:00

108 BBC HD

113 ITV2

BBC HD Preview

Red Cap

To return to the previous TV Guide list before you have selected

the channel genre or programme type

Select “All Channels” of channel genre or “All Types” of the

Red Cap

News Show

Red Cap

News Show

Blue Wave Great

the

114 ITV2+1

115 ITV3

Love USA

100 Sheep Dream

Heartbeat

UFO

USO

100 Sheep Dream

Hot Wave

116 ITV3+1

117 ITV4

Used Car

Deal

120 Channel4 Behind me

Black House

Crowntown

programme type in step

Select Channel

Page Up

Page Down

Info

GUIDE

Sel ct Prog amme

RETURN

Portrait Landscape

+24 hou

To exit

og Type

Channel Genre

Press [BACK/RETURN ].

Channel Genre

All Channels

to display the

list of channel genre.

Notes

(Blue)

• The broadcasters allocate individual programmes to topic areas.

This function does not work properly unless the information which

distinguishes the channel genre and programme type sent from

broadcast stations is correct.

• If the unit is disconnected from the AC mains, all programme data

are lost.

• The programme list is available if this unit has found a digital station

and loaded the information in the memory. This process can take a

while depending on the particular station.

All Channels

Entertainment

News & Sport

Movies

Lifestyle

Music

Children

Special Interest

Radio

Shopping

• The programme list data are continuously downloaded in the

background when the unit is turned on. That means that the

programme list can sometimes change while you are looking at it.

e r

to select the desired item.

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced Playback

Switching the DIRECT NAVIGATOR appearance

Selecting Titles to Play

You can easily select and play recorded programmes

by using DIRECT NAVIGATOR.

“Grouped Titles”/“All Titles”

HDD

While the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen is displayed

Press [OPTION].

Press [ , ] to select the item, then press [OK].

e r

RAM

HDD

-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW -RW(VR)

e. g.,

While stopped

DIRECT NAVIGATOR

rouped Titles

Time Remaining 45:54 DR

Date Channel Time

Release Grouping

All Titles

DEO

Title Name

HDD

P CTURE

MUS C

Tit es

HDD

“Grouped Titles” or “All Titles”

25/05

Born And Bred:

Wrath ul

12:36

1:35

01/06 AV2

PICTURE / MUSIC

01/06 AV1

1:13

Rec time

0:00(DR)

Grouped Titles screen

All Titles screen

Not

ewed

Two or more titles recorded in

the Day/Date or series timer

recording mode are bundled

and displayed as one item.

Displays all titles.

Page 01/01

Se ect

PICTURE

OPTION

VIDEO

RETURN

MUSIC

HDD RAM

RECT NAVIGATOR Grouped Titles

T me Remaining 45:54 DR VIDEO

DIRECT NAVIGATOR All Titles

When “VIDEO” is not selected, press the “Red”

button to select “VIDEO”.

Time Remaining

DEO

45:54 DR

HDD

P CTURE

MUSIC

Titles

PICTURE MUSIC

Title Name

Date Channel Time

Title Name

No Date Day Channel Time

001

25/05

01/06 AV2

And

ed:

Wrathful

25/05 SAT

Born And Bred:

Play School: Food Friday

Wra

12:36

1:35

12:36

12:37

002 25/05 SAT

003

AV2

01/06 AV1

1:13

01/06 SUN

01/06 SUN AV1

1:13

004

Rec ime

Rec time

00(DR)

0:00(DR)

to select the title you want

e r

Not viewed

Not

ewed

to watch, then

Page 01 01

Page 01/01

Select

CTURE

Se ect

OPTION

DEO

OPTION

VIDEO

RETURN

MUS

PICTURE

MUSIC

Select the item marked

with , then press [OK] to

display the bundled titles.

Tips

To view other pages

Press [ ].

u i

To exit the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

Playback the title that was viewed once

HDD

You can choose to start the playback from the point you have

last stopped, or from the beginning when the resume play

function (➔ 26) is operating.

DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen icons

Protected.

While the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen is displayed

Press [OPTION].

Press [ , ] to select “Play”, then press [OK].

e r

Not recorded due to recording protection (Digital

broadcasts, etc.)

It cannot be played because data is damaged, etc.

Currently recording.

Press [ , ] to select “Last Stopped” or

w q

“Beginning”, then press [OK].

Groups of titles (

only)

HDD

Title that was recorded but has not yet been

played ( only)

To sort the titles for easy searching

HDD

(All Titles screen only)

This function is convenient when searching for one title to

playback from many titles.

HDD

Titles that cannot be copied

Titles with guidance information (➔ 98, Parental

Control) or title with child lock (➔ 97, Child Lock)

Press [OPTION].

Press [ , ] to select “Sort”, then press [OK].

Radio programme

e r

Press [ , ] to select the item, then press [OK].

If you select an item other than “No.”

• The DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen will reappear

after playback of the selected title has finished. (You

cannot play titles continuously.)

• Skip and Time Slip will function only with the title

currently being played back.

e r

(NTSC) Title recorded using a different encoding system

(PAL) from that of the TV system currently selected on

the unit.

• Alter the “TV System” setting on this unit to suit

(➔ 101).

• If you exit the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen, or

switch to another DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen, the

sort will be cancelled.

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Advanced Playback

To play grouped titles

HDD

Skip

You can skip to the beginning (or the end) of Title/

Chapter. Skip is operated for each chapter.

Press [ , ] to select the group, then press [OK].

e r

Press [ , ] to select the title, then press [OK].

e r

Play the titles continuously (Grouped Playback)

While the Grouped Titles screen is displayed, Press [ ,

to select the group and press [ ] (PLAY).

During playback or while paused

– Each press increases the number of skips.

– DivX: Press [ ] to return to the beginning of the

]

e r

To edit the group of titles

HDD

title currently playing.

(Grouped Titles screen only)

HDD

Press [ , ] to select a title or a group, then press

e r

[ ].

Quick View (Play x1.3)

A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you

select all necessary titles.

Except

(It will not work even if it is finalised)

-RW(V)

DivX

-RW(VR)

• Press [ ] to cancel.

Allows you to increase the play speed slightly without

distorting the audio.

Press [OPTION].

Press [ , ] to select the option, then press [OK].

e r

Create Group:

PLAY/x1.3

Press [ , ] to select “Create”, then press [OK].

w q

During playback

(Press and hold.)

Selected titles are bundled to form a group.

Release Grouping:

– Press again to return to normal speed.

– Image may not be played back smoothly in case of

Press [ , ] to select “Release”, then press [OK].

w q

DR, HG, HX, HE, HL mode titles or

• When a group of titles has been selected, all the titles in

the group are released.

AVCHD

• When a title in a group has been selected, the title is

removed from the group.

Direct Play

Regarding the group name

The name of the first title in the group is used as the group

name.

During playback, you can access specific titles or

scenes through direct entry of the numbered buttons.

DIRECT NAVIGATOR Grouped Titles

Time Remaining 45:54 DR

Date Channel T me

RECT NAVIGATOR

Grouped Titles

DEO

Title Name

HDD

Time Remaining 45:54 DR

VIDEO

HDD

P CTURE

MUS C

Tit es

P CTURE

MUSIC

Title Name

Date Channel Time

•

AVCHD

Input a 3-digit number.

25/05

01/06 AV2

Born And Bred:

Wrath ul

25/05

12:36 Born And Bred: A Wrathful Go

12:37 ay School: Food Fr day

12:36

1:35

abc

def

01/06 AV1

1:13

Rec time

ime

e.g.,

[0] ➔ [0] ➔ [5]

0:00(DR)

00(DR)

15:

[0] ➔ [1] ➔ [5]

ghi

jkl

mno

Not

ewed

Not viewed

•

Page 01 01

DVD-V

Page 01/01

Se ect

PICTURE

OPTION

Select

OPTION

VIDEO

Input a 2-digit number.

qrs

tuv

xyz

RETURN

MUSIC

e.g.,

15:

[0] ➔ [5]

[1] ➔ [5]

To change the group name

1 Press [ , ] to select the group, then press [OPTION].

2 Press [ , ] to select “Edit”, then press [OK].

e r

3 Press [ , ] to select “Enter Title Name”, then press [OK].

e r

4 Enter the name. (➔ 82, Entering Text)

• Even if the group name is changed, the title names in the

group will not be changed.

Slow-motion Play

Except DivX

Notes

• This function is only available for videos and not available for music

and still pictures.

While paused

– There are 5 slow-motion speeds. Each press

increases the speed.

– Press [ ] (PLAY ) to restart normal playback.

During playback

There are 5 search speeds. Each press increases the

+R DL

Notes

–

• If continued for approx. 5 minutes, slow-motion play pauses

automatically (except DVD-V AVCHD ).

• AVCHD allows slow-motion in the forward direction only.

• You cannot perform this operation when you playback the radio

programme.

search speed. (

Up to 3 speeds)

+RW

– Press [ ] (PLAY) to restart normal playback.

Tips

Depending on the disc, search may not be possible.

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Frame-by-Frame Viewing

Display the subtitle during play

Except DivX

HDD

It is possible to display the subtitles during the playback

if the programme with subtitle is recorded with DR

mode.

While paused

– Each press shows the next or previous frame.

– Press and hold to advance or reverse frame-by-

frame in succession.

– Press [ ] (PLAY) to restart normal playback.

– It will switch between On/Off every time it is

pressed.

Notes

DivX

DVD-V AVCHD

• AVCHD allows Frame-by-Frame in the forward direction only.

• You cannot perform this operation when you playback the radio

programme.

Display with “Subtitles” in the Disc menu

(➔ 86, Subtitles).

Time Slip

Except

, DivX

DVD-V AVCHD

During playback

Notes

When playing DVD-R DL (Dual Layer, single-sided) and +R DL

(Double Layer, single-sided)

e r

to select the time, then

DVD-R DL (Dual Layer, single-sided) and +R DL (Double Layer,

single-sided) discs have two writable layers on one side. If there

is not enough space on the first layer to record a programme,

the remainder is recorded on the second layer. When playing

a title recorded on both layers, the unit automatically switches

between layers and plays the title in the same way as a normal

programme. However, video and audio may momentarily cut out

when the unit is switching layers.

– Each time you press [ , ], the time

increases [ ] or decreases [ ] by 1 minute

intervals.

– Press and hold [ ] or [ ] for 10-minute

intervals.

e r

When switching layers:

Video and audio may momentarily cut

Manual Skip

Except DivX

Skips approx. 1 minute forward with each press.

Second recordable layer

The available

space

During playback

First recordable layer

Title 2

Title 1

(Outer section

of the disc)

(Inner

section of

the disc)

Playback direction

Create Chapters

HDD RAM

When creating chapters in your favourite scenes, you

DVD-R DL

+R DL

can easily reach the head of scene using [

u i

]

(SKIP) or play on Chapter View (➔ 54).

During playback

Tips

Chapters cannot be created during EXT LINK standby (➔ 62).

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Playback of the High Definition Video (AVCHD) and playlists

Notes

Playback of the High Definition Video

(AVCHD)

• Multiple titles may not playback continuously depending on the disc.

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR], and playback by selecting the title.

• It may pause for a few seconds on the break of images when

editing such as partial deletion is performed.

• High definition video (transfer rate of 24 Mbps or faster) cannot be

played back correctly if it was recorded on a DVD compatible to

double speed or slower.

AVCHD

It is possible to playback the high definition video

(AVCHD) recorded on the Panasonic’s video camera,

etc. on the disc or SD card.

Playback of the playlists created on

other equipment

Insert a disc or SD card.

RAM

-RW(VR)

to select “Play Video

e r

Creation or editing of playlists cannot be done on this unit.

(AVCHD)”, then

e.g.,

Preparation:

• Insert a disc.

• Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.

RAM

DVD-RAM ( AVCHD )

Play Video ( AVCHD )

Copy Video ( AVCHD )

Play Pictures ( JPEG )

This disc is play only and cannot be recorded or

copied to.

With the unit stopped

RETURN

e.g.,

SD Card

Play Video ( AVCHD )

Copy Video ( AVCHD )

Copy Video ( MPEG2 )

Play Pictures ( JPEG )

Copy Pictures ( JPEG )

to select “Others”,

e r

then

SD card is inserted.

FUNCTION MENU

RETURN

DVD RAM

me Remaining

00 EP

Playback

Recording

Delete

Ext Link Standby

Playlists

– Display items differ depending on what is

recorded in each media.

DV Automatic Recording

Recording via AV3 input

Network

Copy

TV Guide

– If the top menu of the disc or SD card to play

was

DVD Management

Setup

Others

RETURN

• Created:

• Not created:

Display the top menu

Display the “DIRECT

NAVIGATOR” screen^ꢂ

to select “Playlists”,

e r

^ꢂIt may not be able to display the “DIRECT

NAVIGATOR” screen depending on the

equipment used to record.

then

, , , to select the playlist,

e r w q

to select the title,

then

Playlists

DVD RAM

Playlist View

e.g.,

DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen

05 06(THU) 0:12 12

05 07(MON) 0:07:31

DIRECT NAVIGATOR Video (AVCHD)

SD CARD

DEO

T tle Name

Fantasista

No Date Day Time

001 15/12 SAT 19:36

12:35 2007 12 07

002 07/12 FRI

Page 01/01

Rec time

OPTION

00:00 07

RETURN

Operation during play (➔ 45 to 47, Advanced

Playback)

Page 01/01

OPTION

VIDEO

RETURN

Tips

To return to the previous screen

Press [BACK/RETURN ].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

To display the top menu

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

When the top menu or “DIRECT NAVIGATOR” is not displayed

Refer to “Direct Play” (➔ 46) to playback.

Operation during play (➔ 45 to 47, Advanced Playback)

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Playing DivX

If the menu screen (➔ left) is not displayed, display it by

performing the following operation.

-R -R DL CD USB

Playing DivX video contents

-R -R DL CD USB

1 Press [FUNCTION MENU].

DivX^®is a digital video format created by DivX, Inc. This is

an official DivX Certified device that plays DivX video.

-R -R DL CD

Press [ , ] to select “Playback”, then press [OK].

e r

You can play DivX video contents recorded with a computer

onto DVD-R, DVD-R DL, CD-R/CD-RW and USB memory.

USB

Press [e, r] to select “Others”, then press [OK].

Press [e, r] to select “USB device”, then press [OK].

Insert a disc or USB memory.

Display items differ depending on what is

recorded in each media.

Notes

• Picture sizes set at the recording time may prevent the unit from

showing pictures in the adequate aspect.You may be able to adjust

the aspect through the TV.

-R -R DL CD USB

• Successive play is not possible.

• Playback is not possible if recording is performed on the HDD drive

or the DVD drive.

e.g.,

Play Video (DivX)

Play Pictures (JPEG)

Play/Copy Music (MP3)

Using the tree screen to find a folder

CD is inserted.

While the ﬁle list is displayed

Press [OPTION].

RETURN

Press [ , ] to select “Select Folder”.

e r

• It will go to

recorded.

automatically if it is only DivX that is

DivX Menu

CD (D vX)

Select Folder

F: Selected folder no./

Total folder no. including

DivX title.

1/21

12 02 2009

Image001

Image002

Image003

Image004

Image005

Image006

Image007

Image008

Image009

Image010

USB

USB device

Play Video ( DivX )

You cannot select

folders that contain no

compatible ﬁles.

RETURN

Copy Video ( AVCHD )

Copy Video ( MPEG2 )

Play Pictures ( JPEG )

Copy Pictures ( JPEG )

Play / Copy Music ( MP3 )

Page 01/01

USB device is inserted.

Press [ , ] to select a folder, then press [OK].

e r

RETURN

The ﬁle list for the folder appears.

Tips

to select “Play Video

e r

To return to the previous screen

Press [BACK/RETURN ].

(DivX)”, then

e.g.,

DivX Menu

Operation during play (➔ 45 to 47, Advanced Playback)

CD (D vX)

D vX

Title Name

001

ABC divx

RETURN

Select

OPT ON

folder

om OPTION menu

Page 01/01

• Files are treated as titles.

e r

to select the title, then

Play starts on the selected title.

Tips

To stop playing

Press [ ].

To show other pages

Press [ ,

u i

To exit the screen

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Playing DivX

Regarding DivX VOD content

ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND:

This DivX^®Certified device must be registered in order to play DivX

Video-on-Demand (VOD) content.

First generate the DivX VOD registration code for your device and

submit it during the registration process. [Important: DivX VOD

content is protected by a DivX DRM (Digital Rights Management)

system that restricts playback to registered DivX Certified devices. If

you try to play DivX VOD content not authorized for your device, the

message “Authorisation Error.” will be displayed and your content will

not play.]

Learn more at www.divx.com/vod.

Display the unit’s registration code.

(ꢀ 104, “DivX Registration” in “Others” menu)

Others

DivX Registration

DivX® Video On Demand

Automatic Standby

Remote Control

Clock

Owner ID

Your registration code is : XXXXXXXX

8 alphanumeric characters

PIN Entry

Power Save

To learn more visit www.divx.com/vod

System Update

DivX Registration

Initialize

RETURN

• After playing DivX VOD content for the first time, another

registration code is then displayed in “DivX Registration”. Do not

use this registration code to purchase DivX VOD content. If you use

this code to purchase DivX VOD content, and then play the content

on this unit, you will no longer be able to play any content that you

purchased using the previous code.

• If you purchase DivX VOD content using a registration code

different from this unit’s code, you will not be able to play this

content. (“Authorisation Error.” is displayed.)

Regarding DivX content that can only be played a set number of

times

Some DivX VOD content can only be played a set number of times.

When you play this content, the remaining number of plays is

displayed.You cannot play this content when the number of

remaining plays is zero. (“Rental Expired.” is displayed.)

When playing this content

• The number of remaining plays is reduced by one if

–you press [ ].

–you press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

–you press [

] or [

] etc. and arrive at another content or

t y

the start of the content being played.

–timer recording starts on the HDD.

–you press [DRIVE SELECT] to change the drive.

• Resume functions work. The number of plays is not reduced when

you restart by resume play function.

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Titles−Editing

HDD RAM

Title Operations

(You can not edit finalised

-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL

discs.)

Delete

+RW

HDD RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW

Use to delete unneeded titles.

Only “Properties” is possible.

-RW(VR)

You can edit titles on the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen:

deleting unwanted parts of titles such as commercials,

changing Thumbnail, dividing and deleting titles, etc.

Important: Once deleted, contents cannot be recovered.

Perform steps

−

of “Accessing the Title View” (➔ left).

Press [ , ] to select “Delete”, then press [OK].

e r

Accessing the Title View

Press [ ] to select “Delete”, then press [OK] to

conﬁrm.

Preparation:

RAM

•

Release protection (disc, cartridge ➔ 92, Setting

Protection).

Notes

Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive.

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

•

Deleting an item increases the available

disc space by the amount of space taken by the item

deleted.

HDD RAM

When “VIDEO” is not selected, press

the “Red” button to select “VIDEO”.

HDD RAM

•

Available disc space does not

-R -R DL +R +R DL

increase after deletion.

Press [ , ] to select a title.

e r

Available disc space increases when you

-RW(V) +RW

– Multiple editing (➔ below, Tips)

delete the last title (the recording space may increase

slightly when other titles are deleted).

Press [OPTION] to display the menu list.

• To view more options

• Available disc space may not increase after erasing a

short title.

– Press [ , ] to select “Edit”, then press [OK].

e r

• Items that cannot be selected are grey.

Enter Title Name

Set up Protection

Cancel Protection

Properties

Partial Delete

Play

HDD RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW -RW(VR)

Refer to “Title

operations”

(➔ right).

Divide Title

Delete

Properties

Edit

Title information is shown (e.g., date, time).

Change Thumbnail

DR File Conversion

Perform steps

−

of “Accessing the Title View” (➔ left).

Chapter View

Press [ , ] to select “Properties”, then press

[OK].

e r

Edit or playback the chapter (➔ 54)

Create Group

HDD

To edit the group of titles

(➔ 46)

Release Grouping

All Titles

Switching the DIRECT NAVIGATOR

appearance (➔ 45)

Play

Properties

PICTURE / MUSIC

Delete

Not Going Out

Properties

Edit

• Playing still pictures (➔ 68)

• Playing music recorded on HDD

(➔ 76)

No.

001

Time

22:07

(

)

Date

9/ 3/2009 MON

BBC TWO Wales

Rec time

0:04 DR

Chapter View

Create Group

Release Grouping

All Titles

Channel

RETURN

Notes

• Restricted recording information remains even after editing

(e.g. dividing a title etc).

• You cannot edit during recording or copying, etc.

Enter Title Name

•

Management information is recorded in unused

+R +R DL

HDD RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW

sections when you edit discs. The available space on these

discs decreases each time you edit their contents.

We recommend that you edit on the HDD and then copy to disc.

You can give a name for the title.

Perform steps

−

of “Accessing the Title View” (➔ left).

Press [ , ] to select “Enter Title Name”, then

e r

Tips

press [OK].

Entering Text (➔ 82)

To return to the previous screen

Press [BACK/RETURN ].

–

Even if the group name is changed, the title

HDD

names in the group will not be changed (➔ 46,

Regarding the group name).

To exit the menu screens

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

To view other pages

Press [

u i

Multiple editing

(Only Delete, Set up Protection/Cancel Protection)

Select with [ , ], then press [ ]. (Repeat.)

e r

–

A check mark appears. Press [ ] again to cancel.

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Titles−Editing

Press [q] (PLAY) and [h] to set the point you want to

divide.

Set up Protection/Cancel Protection

HDD RAM +R +R DL +RW

DIRECT NAVIGATOR Divide Title

Enter Title Name

Time Remaining

HDD

20:08 DR VIDEO

PICTURE MUSIC

Use to prevent accidental erasure of titles.

008

PLAY

Set up Protection

Cancel Protection

Partial Delete

Divide Title

Divide

Perform steps

−

of “Accessing the Title View” (➔ 51).

Preview

Continue

0:43.21

Press [ , ] to select “Set up Protection” or

e r

“Cancel Protection”, then press [OK].

Divide

Change Thumbnail

Press [ ] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].

DR File Conversion

RETURN

Group

DIRECT NAVIGATOR

Press [ , ] to select “Divide” then press [OK].

e r

Time Remain

HDD

– For quicker editing (➔ 53, Tips)

The lock symbol

appears when the title

is protected.

Date

25/05

01/06 AV

–

Selecting “Preview” then pressing [OK] plays the title from

10 seconds prior, to 10 seconds after the division point.

01/06 AV

– To change the point to divide at:

Perform steps again.

−

Press [ , ] to select “Continue”, then press [OK].

e r

Partial Delete

Press [ ] to select “Divide”, then press [OK].

HDD RAM

– The title is divided at that point.

Use to remove unwanted parts of titles, such as commercials.

Notes

Important: Once deleted, the parts cannot be recovered.

Perform steps

Press [ ,

−

of “Accessing the Title View” (➔ 51).

• A short amount of video and audio just before and after

the division point get cut out.

]

to select “Partial Delete”, then press [OK].

e r

•

You cannot divide a title when the resulting parts are too short.

Divided titles form a group of titles.

DIRECT NAVIGATOR Partial Delete

Enter Title Name

Set up Protection

Cancel Protection

Partial Delete

Divide Title

Time Remaining

HDD

20:08 DR VIDEO

P CTURE MUSIC

HDD

008

PLAY

Start

End

Continue

0:43.21

Change Thumbnail

point

ope at on and skip

ease set he start

Start

End

ayback

Change Thumbnail

HDD RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW

Press RETURN to end Partial Delete function.

DR File Conversion

RETURN

It is possible to change the

image displayed on the top menu after finalising.

-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL

Press [q] (PLAY) and [h] to set the start point of

the section you want to erase.

It is possible to change the image displayed on the top

+RW

menu after creating Top Menu.

Settings for “Change Thumbnail” is saved when high

Press [ , ] to select “Start”, then press [OK].

e r

Press [q] (PLAY) and [h] to set the end point of

the section you want to erase.

HDD

speed copy is performed to DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW

(DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL or +RW.

Press [ , ] to select “End”, then press [OK].

e r

– For quicker editing (➔ 53, Tips)

– To delete multiple sections:

Perform steps

−

of “Accessing the Title View” (➔ 51).

Press [ , ] to select “Change Thumbnail”, then

press [OK].

e r

Press [ , ] to select “Next”, and repeat steps

e r

−

DIRECT NAVIGATOR ChangeThumbnail

– Up to 20 sections can be set.

Enter Title Name

HDD

Time Remaining

20:08 DR VIDEO

P CTURE MUSIC

008

Set up Protection

Cancel Protection

Partial Delete

Divide Title

Press [ , ] to select “Continue”, then press [OK].

e r

Change

Press [ ] to select “Delete”, then press [OK] to conﬁrm.

Finish

0:00.00

Start play and select the mage of

a thumbnail

Notes

Change

Change Thumbnail

DR File Conversion

RETURN

• You may not be able to specify start and end points

within 3 seconds of each other.

• Available disc space may not increase after erasing

short parts of titles.

Divide Title

HDD RAM

You can divide a title into two.

Once divided, titles cannot be recombined.

Perform steps

−

of “Accessing the Title View” (➔ 51).

Press [ , ] to select “DivideTitle”, then press [OK].

e r

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

• To cancel the conversion “During standby”

After performing steps

Press [ ] to select “Yes” and press [OK].

• Conversion begins after the unit is put into standby, when

“During standby” is selected.

“COPY” on the unit’s display remains lighted during conversion.

[Only when “Unit’s Display” in the Setup menu is set to “Bright”

(➔ 101).]

Press [ ] (PLAY) and [h] to set the point you want

to use as the thumbnail.

– For quicker editing (➔ below, Tips)

−

w q

Press [ , ] to select “Change”, then press [OK].

e r

– To change the thumbnail:

Perform steps

−

again.

Press [ , ] to select “Finish”, then press [OK].

e r

When “DR ﬁle will be

converted in standby” is

displayed in the

DIRECT NAVIGATOR Grouped Titles

Time Remaining 45:54 DR VIDEO

HDD

PICTURE MUSIC

Date Channel

Time

Title Name

Tit es

25/05

01/06

Born And

ed:

Wrath ul

BBC 1 Wales 12:36

BBC 1 Wales

1:35

DIRECT NAVIGATOR,

the conversion has not

ﬁnished.

Tips

Rec time

0:00(DR)

le wi

conve ted

standby

Not viewed

For quicker editing

Page 01/01

•

Use Search (➔ 46) or Time Sl p (➔ 47) to find the desired point.

Se ect

OPTION

DEO

RETURN

PICTURE

MUSIC

• To skip to the start or end of a title, press [ ] (start) or

[

] (end).

• For better precision, use Slow-motion (➔ 46) and

Frame-by-Frame (➔ 47).

Tips

In order to save HDD capacity, it is recommended that you

delete the original titles (in DR mode) after converting, if they

remains after conversion. (➔ 32, Deleting Titles)

DR File Conversion

Notes

HDD

• To use “DR File Conversion”, the HDD needs enough storage

capacity. Please make space available on the HDD.

• The original data (DR mode) will be deleted after converting

them to HG, HX, HE or HL mode if the programme was copy-

restricted. (➔ 33)

DR File Conversion is a function to convert the recording

mode of the title in DR mode. The converted title will be

copied to HDD. It will take about the same time as playback

of the title to convert the recording mode.

The original data remains after conversion if there is no copy-

restriction.

• The size of the converted programme may increase for some

combinations of programme and recording mode.

• If the power is switched on during the conversion, the

conversion will be cancelled, and start from the beginning

when the power is next switched off.

• The converted version of a programme including multiple video

and audio content will contain only single video and audio

content. The “Audio Mode for Digital Broadcast” setting in the

Setup menu (➔ 100) is applied.

• During Normal Speed Copy with “Subtitles” set to “Automatic”,

you cannot turn off the subtitle displayed on the television.

• When converting to XP mode, select the audio to record with

“Audio Mode for XP Recording” before converting the recording

mode. (➔ 100)

Perform steps

−

of “Accessing the Title View” (➔ 51).

–

Select HDD in step

Press [ , ] to select “DR File Conversion”, then

press [OK].

e r

DR File Conversion

Enter Title Name

Convert the selected title by changing its recording mode.

Please select recording mode and other options, then press OK.

Set up Protection

Cancel Protection

HG High Quality

Recording Mode

Subtitles

Partial Delete

Divide Title

Off

Audio Description

Timing

During standby

Change Thumbnail

DR File Conversion

RETURN

• Select the audio to record when converting to “HG”, “HX”,

“HE”, or “HL” modes. (➔ 100, Audio Channels for HG/HX/HE/

HL Recording)

• In titles with the Auto Renewal Recording function (➔ 41) set, a

programme may be unintentionally converted while in “During

standby”. So it is recommended to convert the recording mode

by selecting “Now”.

Press [ , ] to select the recording mode, then

press [ ].

w q

Press [ , ] to select “Automatic” or “Off”, then

w q

press [ ].

• If converted to the “HG”, “HX”, “HE”, or “HL” mode, an image of

the aspect ratio 4:3 becomes the aspect ratio set in “Aspect for

Recording” in the Setup menu. (➔ 98)

Press [ , ] to select “Automatic” or “Off”, then

press [ ].

w q

Press [ , ] to select when to start the

w q

conversion, then press [OK].

• Regarding titles recorded from radio service

The data size of the title recorded from radio service will be

larger after converted for copy.

“Now”

Conversion begins immediately.

Recording and playback are not available

during conversion. Note also that timer

recording will not be performed during

conversion.

It is recommended that you keep them in DR mode.

Press [

[OK].

w q

] to select “Start”, then press

“During standby” The conversion will be performed a short

time after switching off the power in a

time slot for which no timer recording is

set. If the power is switched on during

the conversion, the conversion will be

cancelled, and start from the beginning

when the power is next switched off.

• If a title with the copy restriction was

selected, the confirmation screen appears

to inform you that the original title will be

deleted after conversion. Press [

select “Yes”, then press [OK].

w q

] to

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Create/Playback/Edit of the Chapter

HDD RAM

Creating/Playback/Editing is possible.

Editing and playing chapters

Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive.

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

-R -R DL -RW(V) -RW(VR) +R +R DL +RW

Only playback of chapter is possible.

When “VIDEO” is not selected, press the “Red”

button to select “VIDEO”.

HDD RAM

Regarding Chapters

Programmes are recorded as a single title consisting

Press [ , ] to select the title, then press

e r

[OPTION].

of one chapter.

Press [ , ] to select “Chapter View”, then press

e r

Title

[OK].

Press [ , ] to select the chapter.

w q

To start play: Press [OK].

Start

End

To edit: Step

To create: Press the “Green” button. (➔ below, Create

HDD RAM

Chapter)

You can divide a title into multiple chapters. Each

DIRECT NAVIGATOR Chapter View

section between the division points (Chapter Marks)

becomes a chapter.

Time Remaining 15:08 DR VIDEO

HDD

CTURE MUS

Play

SOCCER

007

Press OK

art playing from

the selected chap er

Se ec ed chapter can be ed ted

via OPTION

Title

Press RETURN to go back to

previous menu

0:00.00

Chapter

001

Page 001/001

OPT ON

Chapter V ew

Select

RETURN

Edit Chapter Mark

Chapter Mark

Press [OPTION], then press [ , ] to select the

e r

operation, then press [OK].

• The maximum number of items on a disc:

(Depends on the state of recording.)

Refer to “Chapter

Delete Chapter

: Approx. 1000 per title

:Approx. 1000

HDD

RAM

operations” (➔ below).

Combine Chapters

Notes

Tips

• HDD You will not be able to perform the Resume play function

(➔ 26) or “Change Thumbnail” (➔ 52) with a title with the maximum

number of chapters.

• HDD Chapter Marks created will be maintained when copied or

used “DR File Conversion”. But, it will not maintain the exceeded

amount if it exceeds the maximum chapter numbers.

To return to the previous screen

Press [BACK/RETURN ].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

Chapter operations

After performing steps

−

(➔ above)

Create Chapter Mark

During the playback or pause

Select the point where you want to start a

new chapter while viewing the title.

Create

Chapter

Press [CREATE CHAPTER].

DIRECT NAVIGATOR Edit Chapter Mark

Time Remaining

VIDEO

– Chapters are divided at the point pressed.

HDD

15:08 DR

CTURE MUSIC

SOCCER

Play

007

To nsert chapter position,

press OK at selected time

Press RETURN to go to

Chapter View

0:00.00

RETURN

Chapter View

Edit Chapter Mark

Chapter has been created.

1Press [OK] at the point you want to

divide.

Tips

• Repeat this step to divide at other points.

2Press [BACK/RETURN ] to go to

To delete the Chapter Mark

Chapter View screen.

1. While paused

Press [

] and skip to the location you want to delete.

u i

2. Press [CREATE CHAPTER].

3. Press [ ] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].

After performing steps

−

(➔ above)

w q

Delete

Chapter

Press [

] to select “Delete”, then press [OK].

w q

ꢂ

• Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost

and cannot be restored. Make certain before

proceeding.

• Select “Combine Chapters” (➔ below) when you

only want to delete the division point between

chapters. (The recorded contents will not be

deleted.)

Combine

Chapters

Press [

[OK].

w q

] to select “Combine”, then press

• The selected chapter and following chapter are

combined.

^ꢂMultiple editing (➔ 51) is possible.

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Copying Titles

There are following copying methods.

Copy Title Playing

Copy the playing title on the HDD to the disc. (➔ 58)

Make a copying list and then copy.

You can set the unit to copy titles in the way you want. (➔ 59)

Copy

Copy AVCHD

High deﬁnition video (AVCHD format) can be copied from disc, SD card or USB. (➔ 66)

Copy direction

Copy source

Copy destination

Possible copying method

Copy speed

ꢁThe high speed copy may not be

possible depending on the

destination disc or the title to copy.

(➔ 57, When is high speed copy

not possible?)

Copy Title Playing

Copy

RAM

+R +R DL +RW

-R -R DL -RW(V)

HDD

RAM

-RW(VR)

Copy

High speed

HDD

Normal speed

+RW

Before ﬁnalise

-R

-R DL

-RW(V)

Cannot copy

+R DL

ꢂ

DVD-V

After ﬁnalise

-R

Copy

Normal speed

High speed

-R DL

-RW(V)

HDD

+R DL

HDD

RAM

SD Video (MPEG2 format)

ꢁFrom an SD card or

Panasonic’s video camera,

etc. (from USB)

Copy

-R -R DL -RW(V) +R

+R DL +RW

Cannot copy

HD Video (AVCHD format)

ꢁFrom discs

Copy AVCHD

High speed

HDD

HD Video (AVCHD format)

ꢁFrom an SD card or

Panasonic’s video camera,

etc. (from USB)

RAM

-R -R DL -RW(V)

+R +R DL +RW

Cannot copy

^ꢂAlmost all DVD-Video on sale have been treated to prevent illegal copying. Any software that has been so treated cannot be recorded using this unit.

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Copying Titles

Copy speed

(ꢃ: Possible, –: Imposs ble)

Normal speed mode

High speed mode

Copy with shorter time than the recorded time of the

title with same quality (recording mode).

It will take same or longer time as the recorded time

of the titles to be copied.

Features

ꢁEven if you select a recording mode with better

picture quality than the original, the picture quality

does not improve.

Are chapters maintained?

Are thumbnails

maintained?

ꢃ^ꢂ1

ꢃ

ꢃ^ꢂ1

ꢃ^ꢂ2

Recording and Playing

while Copying

ꢃ^ꢂ3

–

^ꢂ1Position of the chapter might shift slightly.

It will not maintain the exceeded amount if it exceeds the maximum chapter numbers on a disc.

–

: Approx. 1000

RAM -R -R DL -RW(V)

–

: Approx. 254

+R +R DL +RW

(Depends on the state of recording.)

^ꢂ2Position of the thumbnails might shift slightly. (May not be maintained depending on the state of recording.)

^ꢂ3Possible only with titles on the HDD

[However it is not possible when copying with ﬁnalisation/creating top menu or when copying SD Video (MPEG2 format) or when

copying HD Video (AVCHD format).]

–You cannot perform chasing play or edit, etc. while copying.

–Still pictures or music cannot be played.

Copy restrictions

Some programmes on freesat channels are copy-restricted.

Copying list icons and functions

Depending on the icon, you may be informed about the on-screen display.

Title contains still picture(s).

• Still picture(s) cannot be copied.

Titles that cannot be copied in high speed mode

Title recorded using a different encoding system

from that of the TV system currently selected time

selected on the unit.

• Titles displaying these marks cannot be

selected.

Titles with guidance information (➔ 34, Parental

Control) or titles recorded from channels with

child lock (➔ 97, Child Lock)

You have to enter your PIN when you select

these titles.

(NTSC)

(PAL)

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Frequently Asked Questions

When is high speed copy not possible?

It will copy at normal speed in following cases:

RAM

ꢁCopying to

in following conditions:

-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW

–Titles in DR, HG, HX, HE, HL mode

–Title of the AVCHD copied to the HDD

ꢁCopying to

in following conditions:

-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW

–Copy including a title that was recorded to HDD with “Recording Format for DVD” set to

“VR format”

–Titles that contain many deleted segments.

–Titles that have been copied to the HDD from an SD card or a Panasonic’s video camera,

etc. with HDD (SD Video) (➔ 67).

–

Titles recorded in “EP” mode and “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)”

+R +R DL +RW

mode.

–

Titles recorded in 16:9 aspect

+R +R DL +RW

Titles recorded in 16:9 aspect using “EP” mode or “FR (recordings

-R -R DL -RW(V)

5 hours or longer) mode

”

ꢁSetting “Recording Mode” to anything but “High Speed”

ꢁCopying from +RW to HDD

ꢁ

When copying from the ﬁnalised disc to HDD

-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL

When copying titles in high speed mode

to high speed recording compatible discs

The sound of the disc rotating becomes louder than normal.

If you want copy to perform more quietly, select “Normal (Silent)” in “DVD Speed for High

Speed Copy” in the Setup menu (➔ 98).

When not copying in high speed mode, titles are temporarily copied at normal speed to the

HDD and then copied at high speed to the disc. The titles that were temporarily copied to the

HDD are then deleted.

-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW

When copying to disc in normal speed

mode

You cannot copy to the disc in the following cases.

–When there is not enough free space on the HDD. (When copying to a new blank disc, if

you intend to ﬁll a new disc when copying to it, the equivalent of up to 4 hours of free

space in SP mode is needed on the HDD.)

–When the number of titles recorded to the HDD and the number of titles to be copied to

the disc is greater than 499 in total.

When stopping the copy during copy

When High-speed copying

All titles that have completely copied at the point cancelled are copied.

When Normal Speed copying

Copies until the point cancelled.

ꢁ

If copy is cancelled during the step while

-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW

temporarily copying to the HDD, then nothing will be copied. However, if copy is cancelled

during the step while copying to disc from the HDD, then only titles completely copied at the

point cancelled are copied.

Even if the title was not copied to the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R,

+R DL or +RW, the amount of remaining writable disc space becomes less.

Is it possible to copy to the disc, SD card, ꢁIt can be copied to the disc.

or USB memory after copying HD video

(AVCHD format) to the HDD?

RAM

–

It will be copied with SD quality. (It

-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW

cannot be copied as it is in HD picture quality.)

ꢁIt cannot be copied to SD card or USB memory.

MPEG-2 or AVCHD ﬁles are not

ꢁOnly MPEG-2 or AVCHD on a Panasonic’s video camera, etc. will be recognised. MPEG-2

recognised.

or AVCHD copied to USB memory or an SD card will not be recognised.

Regarding titles recorded in DR mode

from radio service

Picture data will be added to the titles recorded in DR mode from radio service when copying

them or converting them to these recording modes using “DR File Conversion”. Therefore,

the data size will be larger after copying or “DR File Conversion”.

–If you are going to copy the titles to disc with least audio degradation

It is recommended that you select LP mode.

–If you are going to copy the titles to disc with least data size

It is recommended that you select them to EP (8 hours) mode.

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Copying Titles

Speed and recording mode when copying

Copy Title Playing

Titles in DR, HG, HX, HE or HL mode

Copy the playing title on the HDD to the disc.

• It will start copying from the beginning of the title

regardless of the playing position.

Copy destination

Copy speed

Recording mode

RAM

-R -R DL -RW(V)

+R +R DL +RW

Normal speed

HDD → RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW

Playback the title to copy.

Titles in XP, SP, LP, EP or FR mode

Copy destination

Copy speed

Recording mode

High speed^ꢂ1

Same as title to be

copied^ꢂ1

RAM

High speed^{ꢂ1 ꢂ2}

Same as title to be

copied^ꢂ1

-R -R DL -RW(V)

+R +R DL +RW

When copying the title in DR mode with multiple

audio and subtitles

^ꢂ1When the copy destination (disc) does not have enough space,

copy will perform at normal speed in FR mode.

RAM

-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW

^ꢂ2Titles that were recorded with “Recording Format for DVD” (➔ 98)

set to “VR format” will be copied with normal speed. In the

following cases, even if “Recording Format for DVD” is set to

“Video format”, copy will perform at normal speed.

–

Only the audio selected in “Multi Audio/AD” in

the Disc menu will be copied for the multiple

audio. (➔ 86)

+R +R DL +RW

ꢁ

When the copying source was recorded in “EP”

or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.

–

Subtitle displayed during playback will be

copied. (➔ 47)

ꢁWhen the copy destination (disc) does not have enough space.

ꢁWhen the title aspect for the copying source and “Aspect for

Recording” do not match.

ꢁWhen the title aspect for the copying source is 16:9:

+R +R DL +RW

-R -R DL -RW(V)

–

copying source was recorded in “EP” or

to select “Copy Title

e r

“FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.

Playing”, then

To play DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R

and +R DL on other players, it is necessary to ﬁnalise them after

copy (➔ 94). To play +RW on other players, we recommend you

“Create Top Menu” (➔ 94), but they may not play on all DVD

players.

w q

to select “Start”,

then

Tips

To stop copying

Press and hold [BACK/RETURN ] for 3 seconds.

To return to the previous screen

Press [BACK/RETURN ].

Recording and playing while copying

You can record and play using the HDD while high speed copying.

• Still pictures and music recorded on the HDD cannot be played.

• To confirm the current progress

Press [STATUS ].

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Set other settings.

–If you are not going to change these settings, press [

Copying using the copying list

—Copy

]

twice (➔ step

)

Press [

e r

] to select “Other Settings”, then press [ ].

HDD ↔ RAM +RW

-RW(VR) → HDD

HDD → -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL

You can order titles as desired for copy to disc.

“Subtitles”

(Only when copying titles in DR mode and the recording

mode other than High Speed is selected)

Press [

] to select “Subtitles”, then press [OK].

e r

Press [FUNCTION MENU].

Press [

] to select “Automatic” or “Off”, then press [OK]

e r

Press [ , ] to select “Copy”, then press [OK].

e r

• If “Automatic” is selected

Subtitle selected in “Preferred Subtitles” in the Setup

menu (➔ 97) will be copied. (The copied subtitle cannot

be switched during playback.)

• If “Off” is selected

Subtitle in the source titles will not be copied.

FUNCT ON MENU

HDD

Time Rema

30 00 DR

Copy

Playback

Recording

Delete

Cancel All

Source

HDD

DVD

1 ^{Copy Direction}

HDD

DVD

Copy

Destination

TV Guide

2 ^{Copy Mode}

VIDEO High Speed

Information of the copy dest na ion

DVD RAM

“Finalise” or “Create Top Menu”

Others

3 ^{Create List}

Copy res cted itle can be

copied on to disc

( HDD → -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW only)

RETURN

Start Copying

Press [

then press [OK].

] to select “Finalise” or “Create Top Menu”,

e r

Select the copy direction.

RETURN

Press [ ] to select “On” or “Off”, then press [OK].

If “On” is selected

e r

–If you are not going to change each setting, press [

several times (➔ step ).

]

– -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL After ﬁnalising, the

discs become play-only and you can also play them on other

DVD equipment. However, you can no longer record or edit.

– +RW Create the Top Menu. Top Menu is a convenient

function. We recommend you create the menu before

playing a +RW disc on other equipment.

Set the copy direction.

–If you are not going to change the copying direction, press

[

] (➔ step ).

Press [

] to select “Copy Direction”, then press [ ].

e r

Press [

] to select “Source”, then press [OK].

] to select the drive, then press [OK].

e r

“Audio Description”

(Normal Speed Copy only)

If you select “HDD”, “Destination” is automatically set to

“DVD” or vice versa. (➔ step

)

Press [

e r

] to select “Audio Description”, then press [OK].

Press [

] to select “Destination”, then press [OK].

] to select the drive, then press [OK].

e r

Press [

] to select “Automatic” or “Off”, then press [OK].

e r

The same drive as the copy source cannot be selected.

Press [ ] to conﬁrm.

• If “Automatic” is selected

If title recorded in DR mode includes Audio Description,

the title will be copied with Audio Description.

• If “Off” is selected

Set the recording mode.

–If you are not going to change the recording mode, press

Title recorded in DR mode will be copied without Audio

Description.

[

] twice (➔ step ).

Press [

] to select “Copy Mode”, then press [ ].

e r

Press [

[OK].

] to select “Format”, then press [OK].

] to select “VIDEO”, then press [OK].

] to select “Recording Mode”, then press

e r

Press [ ] to conﬁrm.

e r

Press [

] to select “Start Copying”, then press [OK].

e r

Press [ ] to select “Yes”, then press [OK] to start copying.

Press [

Press [ ] to conﬁrm.

] to select the mode, then press [OK].

e r

Edit the copying list

Select the item after step

Press [OPTION].

–

(➔ left).

Delete All

Add

–If you are going to copy a registered list without making

any changes to it, press [ ] twice (➔ step ).

Press [

e r

] to select “Create List”, then press [ ].

Delete

Move

Copy

Cancel All

Destination Capacity: 4366 MB

Size:

0 MB ( 0%)

1 ^{Copy Direction}

Size

Title

New item (Total=0)

HDD

DVD

2 ^{Copy Mode}

VIDEO High Speed

Delete All

Add

Delete all items registered on the copying list.

3 ^{Create List}

1. Press [ , ] to select “Delete All”, then

e r

press [OK].

Page 01/01

Start Copying

RETURN

2. Press [ ] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].

OPTION

w q

Create copy list.

Add new items to the copying list.

1. Press [ ] to select “Add”, then press [OK].

Press [

] to select “New item”, then press [OK].

] to select the title, then press [ ].

e r

2. Press [ , ] to select the title, then press

e r

A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you

select all necessary items.

– Press [ ] again to cancel.

[ ].

A check mark is displayed. Repeat this

step until you select all necessary items.

– The items will be copied in the order of the copying list.

If you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one

item at a time.

• Press [ ] again to cancel.

3. Press [OK].

Delete the selected items.

Delete

Move

– To view other pages

1. Press [

] to select “Delete”, then press [OK].

] to select “Yes”, then press [OK]

e r

2. Press [

Press [

u i

w q

Press [OK].

– To edit the copying list (➔ right)

You cannot start copying when the value of the “Size”

exceeds 100% (“Destination Capacity” is not sufﬁcient)

(➔ 60, About the data size for copying).

Move selected items or change the order of

items on the copying list.

1. Press [ ] to select “Move”, then press [OK].

e r

2. Press [ , ] to select the destination, then

e r

press [OK].

Press [ ] to conﬁrm.

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Copying Titles

Cancel all registered copying setting and lists

Tips

After performing steps

−

(➔ 59)

To return to the previous screen in steps

–

Press [BACK/RETURN ].

Press [ , ] to select “Cancel All”, then press

e r

[OK].

To view other pages in step

Press [ ].

−

u i

Press [ ] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].

• The settings and lists may be cancelled in the following

situations.

While copying (after step

To stop copying

)

–When a title, still picture, etc. has been recorded or deleted

at the copy source

Press and hold [BACK/RETURN ] for 3 seconds.

(You cannot stop while finalising.)

–When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off

the unit, remove the card open the tray, change the copy

direction, etc.

When you stop High-speed copying

All titles that have completely copied at the point

cancelled are copied.

When you stop Normal Speed copying

Copies until the point cancelled.

About the data size for copying

– -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW If copy is cancelled

during the step while temporarily copying to the

HDD, then nothing will be copied. However, if copy is

cancelled during the step while copying to disc from

the HDD, then only titles completely copied at the

point cancelled are copied.

Data size of each registered item

Destinatio Capa i y 4343MB

Size:

0MB (0%)

Title

New item (Total=0)

Data size recorded to the copy destination

• When copying at normal speed, the

total data size will change according to

the recording mode.

No. Size

Page 01/01

• The total data size shown may be

larger than the sum of the data sizes

for each registered item, because of

data management information being

written to the copy destination, etc.

Even if the title was not copied to the DVD-R, DVD-R

DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL or +RW,

the amount of remaining writable disc space becomes

less.

Recording and playing while copying

You can record or play using the HDD while high

speed copying. (Only when high speed copying without

finalising or creating Top Menu)

– Still pictures and music recorded on the HDD cannot be

played.

To check the properties of a title and sort Copying list

After performing (➔ 59)

−

Press [e, r] to select the title, then press

[OPTION].

Press [OK] to cancel the screen display.

Properties

Sort

– To confirm the current progress

Press [STATUS ].

Grouped Titles

Press [e, r] to select “Properties” or “Sort”, then

press [OK].

Notes

• Titles in the grouped titles and other titles cannot be

registered simultaneously.

Properties:

• To play DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video

format), +R and +R DL on other players, it is necessary

to finalise them after copy. To play +RW on other

players, we recommend you “Create Top Menu” (➔ 94), but

they may not play on all DVD players.

The name, recording date, channel etc. of the selected title are

shown. (You cannot select this item if a title has a check mark.)

Sort (All Titles screen only):

Press [e, r] to select the item, then press [OK].

This changes the way that titles are displayed.You can select to

display titles by No., Date, Day, Channel, Start Time and Title Name.

(You cannot select this item if a title has a check mark.) If you close

the Copying list screen, the display order is cancelled.

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

When the top menu is displayed

Press [ , ] to select the title you want to

start copying, then press [OK].

Copying a finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL,

DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and +R

e r w q

My favourite

01/02

Chapter

DVD-V → HDD

Chapter

You can copy the content of finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL,

DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, and +R DL to the HDD

and re-edit the content copied to the HDD.

While playing a disc, the content being played is copied to the

HDD according to the set time.

• When “Recording Format for DVD” (➔ 98) is set to “Video

format” and you make a copy, the copy will be made using

the picture size selected in “Aspect for Recording” (➔ 98) of

the Setup menu.

While playing in order, all the titles after the selected

title are recorded until the set time. (After the last

title on the disc has finished playing the top menu is

recorded until the set time is reached.)

Tips

To return to the previous screen in steps

Press [BACK/RETURN ].

−

• Operations and on screen displays during copy are

also recorded.

• Almost all DVD-Video on sale have been treated to prevent

illegal copying, and cannot be copied.

• The following cannot be copied:, Video CD, Audio CD and

so on.

To stop copying after step

Press [ ].

You can also press and hold [BACK/RETURN ] for 3

seconds to stop copying.

• If stopped partway, copying will be up to that point.

Preparation:

• Insert the finalised disc (➔ 118).

Notes

After performing steps

−

(“Format” is automatically set to

“DVD-Video”) (➔ 59, Copying using the copying list−Copy)

• The screen on the right is recorded at the beginning.

• The content is recorded as 1 title from the start of copy to

the end.

• If play does not begin automatically

or if the top menu does not display

Set “Copy Time”.

– If you are not going to change the setting

(➔ step ).

Setting the unit to copy according to the set time

automatically, press [ ] (PLAY) to start.

Press [

] to select “Copy Time”, then press [ ].

e r

•

Even if you copy a high quality video/audio

DVD, the original picture and audio quality

cannot be exactly replicated.

Press [

] to select “Time Setting”, then press [OK].

e r

– Setting the unit to copy all the content on the disc

Press [ ] to select “Off”, then press [OK].

e r

•

If you want to copy a title from a DVD-RW (DVD Video

Recording format), create a copying list and then copy (➔

Press [ ] to confirm.

Copy will continue until there is not enough available

recording space on the HDD.

59, Copying using the copying list−Copy).

– Setting the copying time

Press [

] to select “On”, then press [OK].

] to select “Copy Time”, then press [OK].

e r

Copy

Cancel All

1 ^{Copy Direction}

DVD

HDD

2 ^{Copy Mode}

Hour

Min.

DVD Video SP

Set the time a few minutes longer.

3 ^{Copy Time}

Press [

] to select “Hour” or “Min.”, then press

w q

[

] to set the recording time.

e r

Press [OK].

Press [ ] to confirm.

Copying to the HDD continues for the set time even

after the content being played finishes.

– Set a few minutes longer than the source title, in order to

include the operation time before play begins.

Press [ , ] to select “Start Copying”, then press

e r

[OK].

Press [ ] to select “Yes”, then press [OK] to start

copying.

– The disc top menu is displayed.

– Disc play automatically begins from title 1 when “Title 1” is

selected from the “Auto-Play Select” menu when finalising

the disc (➔ 94).

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Recording from a Satellite or Cable Receiver

HDD

Linked timer recordings with

external equipment (SKY Digital

STB, satellite/cable receiver)–EXT LINK

Manual Recording

Preparation:

• Connect a satellite or cable receiver to this unit’s

input terminals (➔ 109).

• When the output signal from the external

equipment is NTSC, change the “TV System” to

“NTSC” in the Setup menu (➔ 101).

To record programmes from a SKY Digital STB,

satellite/cable receiver using timer programming

Preparation:

•

Make sure you connect the AV2 input terminal of this

unit to “VCR Scart Terminal” of a SKY Digital STB,

satellite/cable receiver with a 21-pin scart cable (➔ 109).

• Set the “AV2 Input” and “Ext Link” to match the

connected equipment in the Setup menu (➔ 102).

With the unit stopped

to select “AV2” for the

Make timer programming on SKY

Digital STB, satellite/cable receiver.

satellite or cable receiver you

have connected.

–

Refer to the equipment’s operating instructions.

to select the HDD drive.

to select the recording mode.

–

DR, HG, HX, HE, HL, FR mode cannot be

selected.

– “EXT-L” lights on the unit’s display to indicate

timer recording standby has been activated.

–

The guidance information of EXT LINK appears.

Select the channel on the satellite

or cable receiver.

to start recording.

Tips

To set external link standby using the FUNCTION MENU display

Perform step (➔ above)

1. Press [FUNCTION MENU].

Tips

To skip unwanted parts

2. Press [

3. Press [

4. Press [

] to select “Others”, then press [OK].

] to select “Ext Link Standby”, then press [OK].

] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].

e r

Press [ ] to pause recording. (Press again to restart recording.)

e r

w q

To stop recording

Press [ ].

To cancel the external control

Turn on this unit.

Press [EXT LINK] to stop recording or to cancel linked timer

recording standby (“EXT-L” disappears.).

Notes

• During EXT LINK standby mode or recording, you cannot press

[INPUT SELECT] to select external input other than AV2.

• In order to prevent accidental operation, press [EXT LINK] to cancel

the setting after recording is finished.

• This function does not work when “TV System” is set to “NTSC” in

the Setup menu (➔ 101).

• This function does not work with some equipment. Refer to the

equipment’s operating instructions.

• The beginnings of recordings may not be recorded correctly in

some cases.

• When “Ext Link” is set to “Ext Link 2”, this function does not work if

the input signal is NTSC system.

• Programmes are recorded as one title on this unit when the end

time of the earlier timer recording and the start time of the later

timer recording are close to each other.

To divide the titles, go to “Divide Title” (➔ 52).

• While the unit is in EXT LINK standby mode or recording, AV1

output terminal outputs the signal which is input from the AV2 input

terminal irrespective of “AV1 Output” setting (➔ 102).

• EXT LINK recording is available on HDD only.

• During EXT LINK standby mode or recording, playback is available

on both HDD and DVD drive. However, during EXT LINK recording,

DVD-Video, still pictures or music cannot be played back.

• When “EXT-L” lights on the unit’s display, Direct TV Recording is

unavailable.

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Recording from an External Device

Tips

To skip unwanted parts

Press [ ] to pause recording. (Press again to restart recording.)

This unit

To stop recording

Press [ ].

VIDEO

L/MONO AUDIO

S VIDEO

DV IN

The confirmation screen appears. Press [OK].

AV3

Notes

• When timer recording starts while recording from an external

device, timer recording takes priority. Recording from the external

device stops:

–When a timer recording from an external device starts.

–When another timer recording using this unit’s tuner starts.

• If video is copied from another piece of equipment to this unit, then

the video quality will be degraded.

DV cable

(IEEE 1394, 4-pin)

S Video

cable^ꢂ

Audio/Video

cable

Category

Listening to the Audio Description

This function can aid visually-impaired viewers by adding an audio

track to describe events on-screen.

FS 951 BBC ONE Wales

BBC News

13:07

All freesat Channels

For info press

19:00 19:30

Encrypted

Now

AD Subtitles TXT Multi Audio

When “AD” appears in digital satellite channel information

Encrypted

During scrambled broadcasting

(You cannot watch the broadcast).

to show the OPTION menu.

Audio Description service may be available.

Subtitles

TXT

Subtitle can be displayed.

to select “Multi Audio/AD”,

e r

Digital TEXT is possible.

then

Multi Audio Programme is broadcast in multi-channel sound.

Personal guidance information exists.

PIN is needed to playback the title when you

record the programme with mark.

You can check the information by pressing

[STATUS ].

– Multi Audio/AD panel appears.

w q

to select “AD”,

then

“AD”, “Subtitles”,

“TXT”, “Multi

e.g.,

19:35

All freesat Channels

Exit info

103 ITV Wales

Coronation Street

19 : 30 20 : 00

Now

Audio” indications

are displayed as

available on

Notes

[AD]

• Programmes are recorded with Audio Description when you record

them with set to “AD”.

particular

programmes, but may not be available for all individual

programmes being broadcast. Display the extra information to

confirm availability of these functions.

Tips

To turn off the Audio Description

In the step

press [EXIT].

above, press [

w q

] to select other than “AD”, then

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Showing the Digital TEXT (MHEG)

Showing Subtitles

When “TXT” appears in digital satellite channel

information

When “Subtitles” appears in digital satellite channel

information

to show the Digital TEXT.

to show subtitles.

– Press again to hide.

Notes

• Programmes are recorded with subtitles when you record them with

the subtitles on.

• During recording the Digital TEXT function is not possible.

• The Digital TEXT function depends on respective stations.

• When subtitle is on or the digital satellite channel information is

displayed, the Digital TEXT function does not work.

Tips

To select subtitle language (➔ 97, Preferred Subtitles)

Tips

To view another page of Digital TEXT (MHEG)

Signal Quality

Press [ ] to select another page, then press [OK].

e r

No Signal The digital satellite broadcast signal is

not being received.

No Service No broadcasts are currently available.

• You can also use the numbered buttons to select another page.

Quickly access to certain topic areas and navigation

Use colour buttons according to on-screen instructions.

If “No Signal” is displayed, check the following;

• Check that the satellite dish is correctly positioned.

Showing Teletext

•

Check that the current digital broadcast channel is correctly broadcasting.

Regarding Teletext

Teletext may be displayed when viewing Other Sat.

Status Messages

The following messages and displays appear to let you

know what operations are being performed and the

status of the unit.

channels. (➔ 101, Teletext)

to show teletext.

During playback and/or recording

, the numbered buttons, or the

e r

Keep pressing to cycle through

available displays.

colour buttons to select the page.

– Follow the instruction on the screen to select the

page.

HDD

REC 1

Current media

Shows current recording or play status.

951

Tips

Channel information

BBC ONE Wales

To change the teletext mode (➔ 101)

To show the sub page (Only when there are sub pages)

Status of recording in background

102 REC 2

Press [ ].

w q

Remaining recording time and recording mode

(e.g.: “76:19 DR” indicates 76 hours and 19 minutes in DR mode)

• Disc remaining time may slightly differ between

different models.

To store frequently viewed page (List mode only)

During the page is displayed

Press the colour button of the colour to store.

Press and hold [OK].

The current date and time

To change stored pages (List mode only)

HDD

REC 1

951

BBC ONE Wales

23:28:43 09/09/2009

Press the colour button of the colour to change.

Enter the new page number with the numbered buttons.

Press and hold [OK].

Remain HDD 76:19 DR

T33

0:00. 26

T40 0:00.29 DR

T41 0:00.07 DR

102 REC 2

Elapsed play time

Elapsed recording

and recording mode

time and recording mode

Play 23:31.17

• When using Pause Live TV

23:31:33 09/09/2009

Live 23:31.33

Current time

The time when the picture currently

displayed was broadcast

No Display

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Convenient Functions

FUNCTION MENU display

to select the item.

w q

• Normal:

By using the FUNCTION MENU display you may

access the main functions quickly and easily.

Normal output

• Side cut:

The black bars on the right and left sides of

the 16:9 image disappear and the image is

enlarged. Please note that the right and left

sides of the image are cut off when the black

bar is not displayed.

Functions displayed depend on the selected

drive or type of disc.

FUNCT ON MENU

me Remaining

22 30 DR

Playback

Display as frame

on the 4:3 aspect

ratio TV screen^ꢂ

Enlarged display

with black bar

erased with Side

cut

Recording

Delete

Copy

16:9 image with

black bars on

the right and left

TV Guide

Others

RETURN

to select an item, then

e r

Enlarged display

with black bar

erased with Side

cut

Displayed with black

bars on right and left

on the 16:9 aspect

ratio TV screen

• If you select “Others”, then press [OK], the

following screen appears. Press [ , ] to

select an item, then press [OK].

e r

FUNCTION MENU

^ꢂOnly when “TV Aspect” (➔ 101) is set to “Letterbox”.

HDD

me Remaining

22 30 DR

• Zoom:

Playback

Ext Link Standby

Flexible Recording via AV input

DV Automatic Recording

Network

Recording

Delete

The black bars on the top and bottom sides

of the 4:3 image disappear and the image is

enlarged. Please note that the top and bottom

sides of the image are cut off when the black

bar is not displayed.

Copy

USB device

TV Guide

Setup

Others

RETURN

• If you press [BACK/RETURN ], you can

return to the previous screen.

4:3 image with

black bars at the

top and bottom

Enlarged display

with black bar

erased with Zoom

Displayed as frame

on the 16:9 aspect

ratio TV screen

Tips

To exit the FUNCTION MENU display

Press [FUNCTION MENU].

Switch the aspect ratio of the screen

When black bars are shown at the top, bottom, left, and

right sides of the screen, you can enlarge the image to

fill the screen.

Notes

• The screen mode is switched to “Normal” in the following situations:

–when you change channel

–when you start or end the playback of a title

–when the unit is turned in standby or on.

•

“Side cut” does not have any effect.

DVD-V

• When “TV Aspect” (➔ 101) is set to “4 : 3” or “Letterbox”, the

“Zoom” effect is disabled.

e r

to select “Aspect”, then

Tips

To return to the previous screen

Press [BACK/RETURN ].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Notes

To pause the TV programme you are

watching—Pause Live TV

• Temporary save is stopped in following cases.

–When save time exceeds 8 hours

You can pause the TV programme you are watching

using this unit’s tuner and resume later by temporarily

saving it on the HDD. This is useful when you have to

briefly stop watching TV to run an errand.

If you stop the Pause Live TV function, then the TV

programme temporarily saved on the HDD will be

deleted.

–When there is no HDD free space

–When 2 programmes are recorded simultaneously

• The Pause Live TV function does not work

–The clock is not set.

–While 2 programmes simultaneous recording

–While watching a programme being recorded

–When DV is selected

• When paused for approximately 5 minutes the screen saver is

displayed [only when “Screen Saver” in the Setup menu is set to

“On” (➔ 101)].

To return to the previous screen, press [BACK/RETURN ].

Turn on the television and select

the appropriate AV input to suit

the connections to this unit.

Turn on this unit and

select the channel.

When you want to pause the TV programme

HDD

PAUSE

Pause Live TV

When you want to resume

PLAY/x1.3

The programme is saved on the HDD in DR

recording mode.

– Programmes can be saved temporary up to 8

hours on the HDD. (This may vary depending

on the HDD free space.)

Operation during Pause Live TV

Press [

t y

The speed increases up to 5 steps.

• Press [ ] (PLAY) to restart play.

Pause

Press [ ].

• Press [ ] (PLAY) to restart.

Quick View

Slow-motion

Press and hold [ ] (PLAY/×1.3).

• Press again to return to the normal speed.

While paused, press [

] or [

The speed increases up to 5 steps.

• Press [ ] (PLAY) to restart play.

Stop Pause Live

1 Press [ ].

2 Press [ , ] to select “Yes”, then

w q

press [OK].

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Disc and Card Management

You can manage discs through formatting, finalising

and other operations.

Setting Protection

RAM

Accessing the Management Menus

Use to prevent accidental erasure of disc.

Perform preparation steps

Management Menus” (➔ left).

−

of “Accessing the

Preparation:

• SD RAM Release protection (disc, cartridge ➔ right, card

Press [ , ] to select “Disc Protection”, then

➔ 23).

e r

press [OK].

• Insert a disc and card.

Press [ ] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].

Protection of cartridge disc

With the unit stopped

Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD or SD

drive.

(With a cartridge)

RAM

With the write-protect tab in the protect

position, you cannot record to, edit,

format, or erase from the disc.

Press [FUNCTION MENU].

PROTECT

Press [ , ] to select “Others”, then press [OK].

e r

FUNCT ON MENU

DVD-RAM

me Remaining

38 EP

FUNCTION MENU

Playback

Recording

Delete

Naming Discs

DVD-RAM

me Remaining

38 EP

Playback

Recording

Delete

Ext Link Standby

Copy

RAM

-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW

You can give a name for the disc.

Perform preparation steps

Management Menus” (➔ left).

Playlists

TV Guide

DV Automatic Recording

Recording via AV3 Input

Network

Copy

Others

TV Guide

DVD Management

Setup

−

of “Accessing the

RETURN

Others

RETURN

Press [ , ] to select “Disc Name”, then press

e r

[OK].

Press [ , ] to select “DVD Management” or “Card

e r

– Entering Text (➔ 82).

Management”, then press [OK].

Tips

• The disc name is displayed in the DVD Management

window.

To return to the previous screen

Press [BACK/RETURN ].

DVD Management

DVD-RAM

F les

Titles

To exit the screen

Time Remaining 5:38 EP Used

Press [EXIT].

My favorite

•

With a finalised discs the name

-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL

is displayed on the Top Menu.

My favorite

01/02

Chapter

• +RW The disc name is displayed only if you play the disc

on other equipment after creating top menu.

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Deleting All Titles

Formatting Discs or Cards

You can delete all titles on the disc at once.

RAM -RW(V) +RW -RW(VR)

Important: Once deleted, contents cannot be recovered.

(New disc only)

+R +R DL

RAM

Perform preparation steps

Management Menus” (➔ 92).

−

of “Accessing the

Formatting is the process of making media recordable on

recording equipment.

Press [ , ] to select “Delete all titles”, then press

[OK].

e r

You can record or edit after formatting the finalised DVD-RW.

Important: Once formatted, contents cannot be recovered.

Press [ ] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].

Perform preparation steps

−

of “Accessing the

Management Menus” (➔ 92).

Press [ ] to select “Start”, then press [OK].

– A message appears when deleting is finished.

Press [ , ] to select “Format Disc” or “Format

e r

Card”, then press [OK].

Press [OK] to complete.

Press [ ] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].

Notes

Press [ ] to select “Start”, then press [OK].

– Formatting starts (_RAMmay take up to a maximum

of 70 minutes).

• Still picture data (JPEG), music data or computer data

cannot be deleted.

– A message appears when formatting is finished.

• Deleting does not work if one or more titles are protected.

Press [OK] to complete.

Notes

• Do not disconnect the AC mains lead while formatting.

This can render the disc unusable.

• When a disc has been formatted using this unit, it may

not be possible to use it on any other equipment.

•

CD Formatting cannot be performed.

_{-RW(V) -RW(VR)}You can format only as DVD-Video format

on this unit.

-R -R DL

•

SD The disc or card cannot be formatted if the

RAM

write-protect tab or switch (disc ➔ 92, card ➔ 23)

is switched to “PROTECT” or “LOCK”. Release the

protection to continue.

• The message “Unable to format” appears when trying to

format discs the unit cannot use.

Tips

To stop formatting

RAM

Press [BACK/RETURN ].

• You can cancel formatting if it takes more than 2 minutes.

The disc must be reformatted if you do this.

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Disc and Card Management

Notes

Selecting the background style—Top Menu

• Do not disconnect the AC mains lead while finalising.

This can render the disc unusable.

• When finalising a high-speed recording compatible disc,

it may take longer than displayed on the confirmation

screen (approximately 4 times longer).

• After finalising

-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW

The background selected here will be displayed as the DVD-

Video top menu after finalising or Create Top Menu (

+RW

Perform preparation steps

−

of “Accessing the

Management Menus” (➔ 92).

–

_{-R -R DL +R +R DL}The disc becomes play-only and you

can no longer record or edit it.

_-RW(V)You can record and edit the disc after formatting

although it becomes play-only after finalising.

Press [ , ] to select “Top Menu”, then press

[OK].

e r

–

Press [ ,

e r w q

] to select the background, then

press [OK].

– When copying in high speed, chapters will be

replicated.

Top Menu List

– The disc finalised on the unit may not be playable

on other players depending on the condition of the

recording.

– There is a pause of several seconds between titles and

chapters during playback.

Display after ﬁnalising

Thumbnail

(Still picture)

Title Name

–

_{-R -RW(V)}Titles are divided into about 5-minute

• You can change thumbnails displayed in the top menu.

(➔ 52, Change Thumbnail)

(

8-minute) chapters, if^ꢂ

– the titles were directly recorded to the disc.

– the titles were copied using the normal speed mode

(excluding _{-R DL +R DL}).

ꢂThis time varies greatly depending on the condition

and mode of recording.

Selecting Whether to Show the Top Menu

First—Auto-Play Select

-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW

Before finalising a disc or creating top menu, select whether

the top menu shows after finalising or creating top menu.

Tips

Perform preparation steps

−

of “Accessing the

After you have finished recording and try to eject the disc,

a screen asking if you want to finalise the disc appears

(➔ 117).

Management Menus” (➔ 92).

Press [ , ] to select “Auto-Play Select”, then

e r

press [OK].

Press [ , ] to select “Top Menu” or “Title 1”, then

e r

press [OK].

• Top Menu:

Create Top Menu

The Top Menu appears first.

• Title 1:

+RW

+RW discs contain no Top Menu data. Top Menu is a

convenient function. We recommend you create the menu

before playing a +RW disc on other equipment.

The disc content is played without displaying the Top

Menu.

Perform preparation steps

Management Menus” (➔ 92).

−

of “Accessing the

Finalising

Press [ , ] to select “Create Top Menu”, then

e r

press [OK].

-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL

You can play these discs on compatible DVD players by

finalising it on the unit, effectively making it into DVD-Video

that complies with DVD-Video standards. Before finalising,

select the background on the “Top Menu” (➔ above). The

menu you create with the unit can also be used on most DVD

players.

Press [ ] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].

Press [ ] to select “Start”, then press [OK].

– “Create Top Menu” cannot be cancelled once

started.

– “Create Top Menu” takes a few minutes.

– A message appears when “Create Top Menu” is

finished.

Perform preparation steps

−

of “Accessing the

Management Menus” (➔ 92).

Press [OK] to complete.

Press [ , ] to select “Finalise”, then press [OK].

e r

Notes

Press [ ] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].

• Recording or editing on the disc may delete the top

menu. In that case, create the top menu again.

• You cannot use the top menu for playing on this unit.

Press [ ] to select “Start”, then press [OK].

– Finalising starts and cannot be cancelled. (may take

up to 15 minutes) (

– A message appears when finalising is finished.

up to 60 minutes)

-R DL

+R DL

Press [OK] to complete.

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setup Menu

Channel Settings

You can change the unit’s settings using Setup menu.

Accessing the Setup Menu

Others

Setup

With the unit stopped

Press [FUNCTION MENU].

(➔ left, Accessing the Setup Menu)

All factory default settings are indicated with “Underlined” text.

Press [ , ] to select “Others”, then press [OK].

e r

FUNCT ON MENU

HDD

Time Remaining

30 00 DR

Tuning

Playback

Ext Link Standby

Flex ble Recording via AV input

DV Automatic Recording

Network

Recording

Delete

Copy

e r

select “Tuning” ➔

Setup

TV Guide

Others

Tuning

freesat Favourites Edit

Access

freesat Channel List

RETURN

freesat Auto Setup

Other Satellite Channel List

Other Satellite Tuning Menu

Signal Condition

Press [ , ] to select “Setup”, then press [OK].

e r

Child Lock

Press [ , ] to select the menu, then press [OK].

e r

Preferred Multi Audio

Preferred Subtitles

Menus

Setup

RETURN

Tuning

HDD/Disc

Picture

Sound

freesat Favourites Edit

You can create Favourites of freesat channels for making viewing

and recording easier. Editing Favourites does not affect the

channel setting itself.

Display

Connection

Network Settings

Others

Favourites Editor

All freesat Channels

101 BBC 1 Wales

Favour tes

RETURN

102 BBC Two Wales

103 ITV1 Wales

104 S4C Digidol

105 Five

106 BBC THREE

107 BBC FOUR

Press [ , ] to select the item you want to

change.

e r

108 BBC HD

Se ect Channel

Items

Options

ore

Page UP

Page Down

RETURN

Others

Add

Add all

Automatic Standby

Remote Control

Clock

4 hours

DVD 1

Press [

[OK].

e r

] to select “freesat Favourites Edit” and then press

Owner ID

PIN Entry

Power Save

System Update

DivX Registration

Initialize

• Timer recording may not work correctly if you edit the Favourites

during timer recording standby.

• Channel numbers cannot be changed, due to broadcast

restrictions.

RETURN

To add channels to Favourites

Press [ ] to select the channel in the “All freesat Channels”

e r

Press [ , ] to select the option.

w q

column to add, then press the “Green” button.

• Repeat this step to add other channels.

• Press the “Yellow” button to add all the available channels to

the Favourites. (Only when no channels have been added to

the Favourites.)

• Follow the instruction on the screen if the operation method

is different.

For Setting details, refer to pages 95–104, 106, 107.

Press [OK] to store the Favourites.

Notes

To delete channels on Favourites

Changed settings remain intact even when switching the

unit to standby mode.

While the Favourites Editor screen is displayed, press [

focus on a channel of the “Favourites” column.

w q

] to

Press [ ] to select the channel in the “Favourites” column,

e r

then press the “Yellow” button.

Tips

• Repeat this step to delete other channels.

• Press the “Blue” button to delete all channels from the

Favourites.

Press [OK] to store the Favourites.

Deleting a channel from a Favourites does not affect the

channel itself.

You can still select the channel from the “All freesat Channels”

column.

To return to the previous screen

Press [BACK/RETURN ].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Channel Settings

freesat Channel List

Auto Setup

You can set channel list of freesat.

You can start the auto setup of the other satellite services.

(➔ 16, Tuning in Other Satellite Services)

Other Satellite Auto Setup - Satellite Selection

Press [ ] to select “freesat Channel List”, then press [OK].

e r

freesat Channel List

115 ITV3

Satellite Selection

Search Mode

Channel Type

Astra2/Eurobird

All

116 ITV3+1

117 ITV4

118 ITV4+1

freesat and other satellite channels

120 Channel 4

121 Channel 4+1

122 E4

Select

Hide

Page UP

Select

Start

Page Down

RETURN

Change

RETURN

Press [ ] to select the channel.

e r

Manual Tuning

To hide unwanted channels

You can set the channel of the other satellite manually.

Other Satellite Manual Tuning

Press [OK]. The check mark disappears.

You cannot select it by pressing [

CH].

1 2

Transpounder Frequency

10773

Polarisation

Symbol Rate (Ksym/s)

(But you can select it by pressing the numbered buttons to enter

the channel number directly.)

Press [OK] again to reveal.

Horizontal

Auto

Se ect

Enter Frequency

Start Scan

RETURN

freesat Auto Setup

Press [ ] to select “Transpounder Frequency”

Press the numbered buttons to enter the transpounder

frequency.

e r

You can restart auto setting for freesat channels if the setup

(➔ 13) fails for some reason.

However, if you perform “freesat Auto Setup”, all channel settings

are deleted. Confirm the programme you set the timer recording

after freesat Auto Setup. Please reset it if the setting information is

not correct. Recordings on the HDD are not be deleted.

Press [

[OK].

] to select “Polarisation”.

] to select “Horizontal” or “Vertical”.

] to select “Symbol Rate (Ksym/s)”.

e r

w q

e r

] to select the desired symbol rate, then press

w q

Press [

] to select “freesat Auto Setup”, then press [OK].

e r

When the confirmation screen appears

–The scan starts.

2 Press [ ] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].

Dish Setup

You can set the dish setup manually.

Dish Setup

Tips

LNB Low Band Frequency (MHz)

LNB High Band Frequency (MHz)

22KHz Command

9750

10600

• You can also use the following method to restart freesat

Auto Setup. When the unit is turned on and stopped,

press and hold [ CH] and [CH ] on the main unit

Satellite services may not be available if changed!

simultaneously for about 5 seconds.

– freesat Auto Setup screen appears.

Select

EXIT

Enter Frequency

RETURN

Reset all

Press [ ] to select “LNB Low Band Frequency (MHz)”.

Press the numbered buttons to enter the LNB Low Band

frequency.

e r

Other Satellite Channel List

You can set channel list of other satellite services.

Press [ ,

e r

[OK].

] to select “Other Satellite Channel List”, then press

Press [ ] to select “LNB High Band Frequency (MHz)”.

e r

Press the numbered buttons to enter LNB High Band

frequency.

Press [

] to select the channel.

e r

• Press the “Red” button to delete the channel.

• Press the “Green” button to swap the channel. And, press the

numbered buttons to enter the channel number you want to

swap, then press [OK].

Press [

] to select “22KHz Command”.

e r

Press [

] to select “On” or “Off”.

w q

• Press the “Red” button to reset all settings.

• Press the “Yellow” button to sort channels.

• Press the “Blue” button to profile the channel.

Signal Condition

You can check the quality and strength of digital satellite broadcast

signals. Realign the dish if you are receiving a poor signal.

To hide unwanted channels

Press [OK]. The check mark disappears.

Press [

] to select “Signal Condition”, then press [OK].

e r

You cannot select it by pressing [

CH].

1 2

Press [

] to select the input you want to check.

w q

(But you can select it by pressing the numbered buttons to enter

the channel number directly.)

Press [OK] again to reveal.

Satellite Signal Condition

Input 1

Dish Input

Channel Name

Signal Quality

Signal Strength

101 BBC 1 Wales

Other Satellite Tuning Menu

You can tune channels from other satellites.

• Press [OK] to show the following settings.

Other Satellite Tuning Menu

Network ID

Transport Stream ID

003B

07FF

Satellite Lock Indicator Not Locked

Channel UP

Change Input

RETURN

Channel Down

Auto Setup

Access

Manual Tuning

Dish Setup

The quality and strength of the signal are shown. Press [

to select the channel.

1 2

CH]

Signal Quality

Below 2 (display red) The signal quality is so poor that there may

be interference in the pictures and sound.

RETURN

2–5 (display orange) The signal quality is basically adequate, but

brief interference in the pictures and sound

is possible in isolated case.

Over 5 (display green) Optimum picture and sound quality.

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Signal Strength

The display for signal strength is grey. “0” means signal strength

0%, “10” means signal strength 100%.

• If the signal is too strong, the display will change from grey to

red. Reduce the signal amplification at your satellite dish.

• When the signal is weak:

– check that the satellite dish is correctly positioned.

– adjust the satellite dish reception.

check that the current digital satellite broadcast channel is

correctly broadcasting.

Child Lock

You can lock a channel or AV input to prevent access to it.

Tuning

freesat Favourites Edit

freesa

Other

Signal

Child

Child Lock

Enter your 4-digit PIN, then press OK.

Prefer

RETURN

Number

Press [

] to select “Child Lock”, then press [OK].

] to enter PIN.

e r

Press [

e r

You can also use the numbered buttons.

It will be the common PIN for “DVD-Video Ratings”, “Child Lock”,

“Parental Control” and “Network Lock”.

Press [OK].

Chi

Lock List TV and AV

Name

AV3

AV4

Type

Lock

freesat

101 BBC

Wales

102 BBC TWO Wa es

103 ITV1 Wa es

104 S4C Digidol

105

Select

Page Up

Page Down

Lock

RETURN

Next Type

Lock

Unlock

Press [ ] to select the channel or AV input to prevent

access to.

Press [OK].

e r

• Press [OK] again to cancel.

• Press the “Yellow” button to lock all channel and AV input.

• Press the “Blue” button to unlock all channel and AV input.

• Press the “Red” button to change the channel type displayed.

AV ➔ freesat ➔ Other sat

• Should you see a lock symbol to show the channel locked. To

unlock, select the channel and press [OK]. The lock symbol will

disappear.

• To change the PIN, see page 104.

Preferred Multi Audio

You can choose the audio language for digital broadcast. If the

selected language is not available, then the original language will

be selected.

Press [

] to select “Preferred Multi Audio”, then press [OK].

] to select “Multi Audio”.

] to select the language from the followings.

e r

w q

[English]

[Welsh]

[Gaelic]

Press [

] to select “Audio Description”.

] to select “On” or “Off”.

e r

Press [ ,

w q

Preferred Subtitles

You can choose the subtitle language for digital broadcast. If the

selected language is not available, then the original language will

be selected.

Press [

] to select “Preferred Subtitles”, then press [OK].

e r

Press [

] to select the language from the followings.

w q

[English] [Welsh] [Gaelic]

[English for hearing impaired]

[Welsh for hearing impaired]

[Gaelic for hearing impaired]

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HDD/Disc Settings

Notes

DVD-V Choose the language for audio, subtitles and disc menus.

If a language which is not recorded is selected, or if languages

are already fixed on the disc, the language set as the default on

the disc will be played instead.

Others

Setup

[Original]

The original language of each disc will be

selected.

This is the language code setting. Input a code

number with the numbered buttons (➔ 129,

“Language code list”).

If the language selected for “Soundtrack” is

not available, subtitles of that language will

automatically appear if available on the disc.

(➔ 95, Accessing the Setup Menu)

All factory default settings are indicated with “Underlined” text.

[Other

]

HDD/Disc

[Automatic]

e r

select “HDD/Disc” ➔

Settings for Recording

HDD/Disc

Press [OK] to show the following settings.

Settings for Playback

Settings for Recording

HDD Management

Access

Recording time in EP mode

Select the maximum number of hours for recording in EP mode

(➔ 36, Recording modes and approximate recording time).

[6 hours]

You can record for 6 hours on an unused

4.7 GB disc.

[8 hours]

You can record for 8 hours on an unused

4.7 GB disc.

RETURN

ꢁThe sound quality is better when using “6 hours” than when

using “8 hours”.

Settings for Playback

Press [OK] to show the following settings.

Aspect for Recording

Soundtrack

Sets the aspect ratio when recording in HX, HG, HE, HL, XP,

SP, LP, EP, FR mode.

[English] [German] [French] [Italian] [Spanish] [Original]

[Other

]

[Automatic] The programme will be recorded in the original

aspect used when recording started (including

Subtitles

when recording started at a commercial, etc.).

[Automatic] [English] [German] [French] [Italian] [Spanish]

[Other

]

[16:9]

[4:3]

ꢁHDD RAM When the recording mode is set to “XP”, “SP”,

“LP”, “EP” or “FR” with the “Recording Format for DVD” set to

“VR format”, the programme will be recorded with the original

aspect ratio.

ꢁIn the following cases, even when set to “Automatic” or “16:9”,

recordings will be made or copied in 4:3.

– -R -R DL -RW(V) When the recording mode is set to “EP” or

“FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.

–When recording to a +R, +R DL and +RW.

[English] [German] [French] [Italian] [Spanish] [Other

]

DVD-Video Ratings

Set a ratings level to limit DVD-Video play.

Follow the on-screen instructions. Enter a 4-digit PIN with the

numbered buttons when the PIN screen is shown. It will be the

common PIN for “DVD-Video Ratings”, “Child Lock”, “Parental

Control” and “Network Lock”.

Setting ratings (When level 8 is selected)

Recording Format for DVD

[8 No Limit]

[1 to 7]

All DVD-Video can be played.

Proh bits play of DVD-Video with corresponding

ratings recorded on them.

Titles recorded to the HDD from external input with “Recording

Format for DVD” set to “Video format” can be copied to DVD-R,

DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW

using high speed mode.

[0 Lock All]

Proh bits play of all DVD-Video.

• Changing settings (When level 0 to 7 is selected)

[Unlock Recorder] [Change Level] [Temporary Unlock]

We recommend turning the setting “VR format” if high speed

copy to DVD-R, etc. is not necessary when recording a

programme. This setting is effective when recording from external

equipment (including DV equipment), or when copying from a

finalised DVD-Video disc.

Parental Control

You can restrict playback of the recorded titles that may include

contents for adult. Follow the on-screen instructions. Enter a

4-digit PIN with the numbered buttons when the PIN screen

is shown. It will be the common PIN for “DVD-Video Ratings”,

“Child Lock”, “Parental Control” and “Network Lock”.

[Video format] You can high-speed copy to DVD-R, etc.

[VR format]

High speed copy from HDD is possible only to

DVD-RAM.

[On]

Titles recorded from programmes that were

broadcasted with guidance information in the night

(21:00–05:30) will be indicated with the

• In some cases, copying to DVD-R, etc. using the high speed

mode does not work.

icon in

DIRECT NAVIGATOR, DELETE Navigator and copy

source selection screen.

You will have to enter the PIN when playing back

these titles.

DVD Speed for High Speed Copy

Select the speed of high-speed copying (When using high-speed

copy compatible discs).

[Maximum]

[Off]

[Normal (Silent)] Selecting “Normal (Silent)” means the noise

generated by this unit is less than “Maximum”,

however the time required for copying will

double (approximately).

HDD Management

• Press and hold [OK] for 3 seconds to show the following settings.

Delete all titles

Delete all titles in HDD.

• Delete does not work if one or more titles are protected.

Format HDD

Format of the HDD is performed.

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Picture and Sound Settings

Sound

Others

Setup

e r

select “Sound” ➔

(➔ 95, Accessing the Setup Menu)

All factory default settings are indicated with “Underlined” text.

Sound

Dynamic Range Compression Off

Downmix

Stereo

Bilingual Audio Selection

Digital Audio Output

Picture

Audio Mode for XP Recording Dolby Digital

Audio Mode for DV Input

Stereo 1

Audio Mode for Digital Broadcast Automatic

e r

select “Picture” ➔

5.1-channel

Audio Channels for HG/HX/HE/HL Recording

RETURN

Picture

Dynamic Range Compression

DVD-V

Change the dynamic range for late night viewing.

[On] [Off] [Automatic]

Still Mode

Automatic

Seamless Play

NTSC Video Output

PAL60

Downmix

Switch the downmix system for playing back multi-channel

surround sound.

RETURN

• When “Dolby Digital”, “DTS” or “MPEG” is set to “Bitstream”,

there are no downmix effects for the audio output.

• The audio output will be in “stereo” in the following cases.

–AVCHD playback

Still Mode

Select the type of picture shown when you pause play. (➔ 134,

[Stereo]

When connected to equipment that does not

support the virtual surround function

“Frames and fields”)

[Automatic]

[Surround encoded] When connected to equipment that supports

the virtual surround function

[Field]

[Frame]

Select if jittering occurs when “Automatic” is selected.

Select if you cannot see small text or fine patterns

clearly when “Automatic” is selected.

Bilingual Audio Selection

Select whether to record the main or secondary audio type when:

• Recording to a DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and

+RW.

Seamless Play

Select the play mode between playlist chapter segments and

partially deleted titles.

• “Recording Format for DVD” is set to “Video format”. (➔ 98)

• Recording sound in LPCM (➔ 100, “Audio Mode for XP

Recording”).

• It is not valid for titles in DR mode or AVCHD videos.

[On]

The chapters in playlists are played seamlessly. This does

not work when there are several audio types included

on the playlist and when using Quick View (Play x1.3).

Additionally, the positioning of chapter segments may

change slightly.

[M 1] [M 2]

• You cannot select the audio on this unit when recording from an

external source, such as when copying from a video cassette

recorder (except from DV equipment connected to this unit’s DV

input terminal). Select the audio on the other equipment.

• When recording from the unit’s DV terminal, select the type of

audio recording from “Audio Mode for DV Input” (➔ 100).

[Off]

The points where chapters in playlists change are played

accurately, but the picture may freeze for a moment.

NTSC Video Output

Select how the NTSC image is output.

[NTSC]

Output as NTSC.

[PAL60] Convert and output as PAL60. Select this when

connected to the PAL format TV.

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Picture and Sound Settings

Digital Audio Output

Audio Mode for Digital Broadcast

Change the settings when you have connected equipment through

the unit’s DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal (➔ 111).

Press [OK] to show the following settings.

Selects the initial setting for Audio tracks.

If programme has both Dolby Digital and MPEG audio tracks,

priority is given to what you select.

Only the selected audio is recorded when converted or copied in

XP, SP, LP, EP or FR recording mode.

(It is recorded in accordance with the setting of “Multi Audio/AD” in

the Disc menu only when it is copied with “Copy Title Playing”.)

PCM Down Conversion

Select how to output audio with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz.

Signals are converted to 48 kHz despite the above settings if the

signals have a sampling frequency of over 96 kHz, or the disc

has copy protection.

[Automatic]

Automatically selects the audio tracks if programme

has more than two tracks. The priority is given in the

following order - Dolby Digital, MPEG.

[On]

Signals are converted to 48 kHz. (Choose when the

connected equipment cannot process signals with a

sampling frequency of 96 kHz.)

[MPEG]

An audio compression method that compresses

audio to small size without any considerable loss of

audio quality.

[Off]

Signals are output as 96 kHz. (Choose when the

connected equipment can process signals with a sampling

frequency of 96 kHz.)

Audio Channels for HG/HX/HE/HL Recording

This will set the audio when converting to the HDD in HG, HX, HE

or HL modes (➔ 53).

[5.1-channel]^ꢂRecord using 5.1 ch audio.

Dolby Digital^ꢂ1

DTS^ꢂ2

[2-channel]

Record using 2 ch audio.

MPEG^ꢂ1

ꢂ

If the audio sampling frequency is not 48 kHz, surround audio

is mixed and recorded in front LR channels. Audio will be

output from two front speakers only, even if you play it on 5.1 ch

speaker connection.

Select to output Do by Digital, DTS Digital Surround, or MPEG

as bitstream or PCM.

Notes

• Incorrect settings can cause noise to be output which can

be harmful to your ears and speakers, and audio will not be

recorded properly on media such as mini discs.

Refer to the operating instructions for connected equipment

to verify whether or not they can decode each of the audio

formats.

• If the unit is connected with the HDMI AV OUT terminal, the

specifications of the connected equipment take preference

over this unit and audio selected in these items may not

be output (e.g., when a television is connected, the HDMI

audio output of this unit is limited to down-mixed 2 ch.).

[Bitstream] Select “Bitstream” when the connected equipment

can decode the respective audio format.

[PCM]

Select “PCM” when the connected equipment cannot

decode the respective audio format.

Refer to the operating instructions for connected

devices to verify whether or not they can decode

each of the audio formats.

Set the speaker output on the amplifier when

output with PCM.

^ꢂ1The default setting is “PCM”.

ꢂ2

The default setting is “Bitstream”.

Audio Mode for XP Recording

Choose the audio type when recording or copying with XP mode.

[Do by Digital] (➔ 134)

[LPCM] (➔ 135)

• The picture quality of LPCM recordings may be lower than that of

normal XP mode recordings.

• The audio recording becomes Dolby Digital even if you selected

LPCM when using a recording mode other than XP.

Audio Mode for DV Input

Select the kind of audio when recording from the unit’s DV input

terminal (➔ 63).

[Stereo 1]

[Stereo 2]

Records audio (L1, R1)

Records added audio such as narration (L2, R2)

subsequent to original recording.

Records both Stereo 1 and Stereo 2.

[Mix]

When recording bilingual broadcast, select the type of audio in

advance from “Bilingual Audio Selection” (➔ 99).

100

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Display and Connection Settings

Connection

Others

Setup

e r

select “Connection” ➔

Connection

TV Aspect

16:9

4:3

(➔ 95, Accessing the Setup Menu)

All factory default settings are indicated with “Underlined” text.

Aspect for 4:3 Video

TV System

PAL

HDMI Connection

Component Resolution

AV1 Output

576i / 480i

RGB 2

Display

AV2 Settings

RETURN

e r

select “Display” ➔

TV Aspect

Display

This setting needs to be changed when connected to a 4:3

standard aspect TV.

On-Screen Messages

Unit’s Display

Screen Saver

Teletext

5 sec.

Bright

[16:9] [4:3] [Letterbox]

FASTEXT

Notes

• Aspect 4:3/16:9

RETURN

4:3

16:9

On-Screen Messages

4:3 standard aspect television

16:9 widescreen television

Choose the approximate time until the digital satellite channel

information screen (➔ 88) disappears automatically.

The length of time the control panel (➔ 85) is displayed can also

be changed, but “Off” does not work.

• 16:9: When connected to a 16:9 widescreen television. However,

the 4:3 aspect ratio picture expands left and right.

• 4:3: When connected to a 4:3 aspect

television, side picture is trimmed for

[Off]

The digital satellite channel information is not displayed.

16:9 picture (➔ 135, Pan&Scan).

[3 sec.] [5 sec.] [7 sec.] [10 sec.]

The “4:3” setting may not work and the

pictures may be shown in the letterbox

style depending on the content.

Unit’s Display

Changes the brightness of the unit’s display.

Regardless of the setting, when “Power Save” (➔ 104) is “On” and

this unit is turned off, the unit’s display is turned off.

• Letterbox: When connected to a 4:3 aspect

television, widescreen picture is

shown in the letterbox style (➔ 135).

[Bright]

[Dim]

Aspect for 4:3 Video

Screen Saver

To play a 4:3 title when connected with an HDMI cable, set how to

show pictures on a 16:9 widescreen television. 4:3 picture from HDMI

output will be slightly smaller than that from the other outputs, e.g.

Scart and component, this is not a malfunction of the unit.

This is to prevent burn-in on the screen.

• When this is set to “On”, the masked-off area on the screen

becomes black.

[Only when connecting with an HDMI cable or a component

video cable and “HDMI Video Format” (➔ 102) is set to any other

mode than “576p/480p”, or “Component Resolution” (➔ 102) is

set to “720p” or “1080i”.]

[4:3]

Picture output expands left or right.

[On] If there is no operation for 5 minutes or more, the displayed

screen switches to the other states automatically.

–When the DIRECT NAVIGATOR, Copying list, DELETE

Navigator or FUNCTION menu is displayed, the screen

saver is not displayed.

[16:9]

Picture is output as original aspect with side panels.

–When music is played, the display returns to the screen

saver mode. (Playback continues.)

–When still pictures are shown (except for slideshows),

the display returns to the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen.

TV System

Change this setting if you connect an NTSC television or to record

NTSC video from another source.

–

The display returns to the screen saver mode when it is

paused by the Pause Live TV. (Pause status will continue.)

[PAL]

– Select when connecting to a PAL or Multi-

system television. Programmes recorded

using NTSC are played as PAL60.

[Off]

– Select to record television programmes

and PAL input from other equipment.

Teletext

–

Select when playing a PAL

input title recorded on the HDD.

HDD

Select the Teletext display mode. (➔ 89)

[FASTEXT] Four differently coloured subjects are situated at the

bottom of the screen. To access more information

about one of these subjects, press the appropriately

colour button. This facility enables fast access to

information on the subjects shown.

[NTSC] – Select when connecting to an NTSC television.

Television programmes cannot be recorded properly.

–

Select to record NTSC input from other equipment.

Select when playing an NTSC

input title recorded on the HDD.

HDD

[List]

Four differently coloured page numbers are situated at

the bottom of the screen. Each of these numbers can

be altered and stored in this unit.

101

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Display and Connection Settings

AV1 Output

Select “Video (with component)” or “S Video (with component)” for

component output (progressive output).

Tips

To change the setting without using the menu (PAL ↔ NTSC)

Set according to the signal and terminal of the connected TV.

While stopped, press and hold [ ] and [ OPEN/CLOSE] on

;

the main unit simultaneously for about 5 seconds.

[Video (with component)]

Select when a TV is connected that can receive a composite signal.

Notes

[S Video (with component)]

Select when a TV is connected that can receive an S Video signal.

• This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have

PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes can

be recorded onto the HDD.)

[RGB 1 (without component)]

•

If “NTSC” has been selected, the TV Guide system cannot be used.

Select when a TV is connected that can receive an RGB signal.

If you always would like to view the picture from the unit in RGB

signal, select this mode. The TV screen will automatically switch to

display the picture from the unit when the unit is turned on.

• If the current “TV System” setting does not match the “TV

System” of a disc or a title recorded on the HDD:

–the title cannot be played.

–the disc cannot be played during recording, timer recording

standby or EXT LINK standby.

Change the “TV System” to play the disc or the title. Also

note that the “TV System” setting should be changed back

to the previous setting after the playback.

[RGB 2 (without component)]

Select when a TV is connected that can receive an RGB signal.

If you would like to switch to display the picture from the unit only

when playback or viewing menus, select this mode.

• If this unit is connected with an HDMI cable and “HDMI Video

Mode” is set to “On”, you cannot select “RGB 1 (without

component)” or “RGB 2 (without component)”.

HDMI Connection^ꢂ1

• Press [OK] to show the following settings.

HDMI Video Mode

AV2 Settings

Select “On” when video is output from HDMI AV OUT terminal.

Set to match the connected equipment.

• Press [OK] to show the following settings.

[On]

[Off]

When the equipment such as ampliﬁers is connected

using HDMI cable, and TV is connected to the

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminal. (Setup before

connecting to the ampliﬁers.)

AV2 Input

Set to “RGB/Video” or “RGB” when receiving or recording RGB

output from external equipment.

[RGB/Video] The unit automatically detects whether the input signal

from the AV2 terminal is an RGB signal or other signals

and makes settings.

[RGB]

[Video]

[S Video]

HDMI Video Format^ꢂ2

You can only select items compat ble with the connected

equipment. If you are concerned about output picture quality, it

may be improved by changing the setting.

[576p/480p] [720p] [1080i]

[1080p]

When outputting 1080p signal, we recommend using

High Speed HDMI cables that have the HDMI logo

(as shown on the cover) and are less than 5 meters

to prevent video distortion etc.

Ext Link

This setting cannot be made when the “TV System” is set to

“NTSC” (➔ 101).

[Ext Link 1] When this unit is connected to a satellite or cable

receiver with a 21-pin Scart cable and this unit receives

a control signal.

[Automatic] Automatically selects the output resolution best suited to the

connected television (1080p, 1080i, 720p or 576p/480p).

Start and stop timings of recording are controlled by

the control signal.

[Ext Link 2] When external equipment with a timer function is

connected.

HDMI Audio Output

[On]

[Off] When connected to TV with HDMI cable, and connected to amplifiers

Recording is continued while the image signal is being

sent to the unit from the external equipment.

Recording is stopped when the image signal is halted

by turning the external equipment off.

not compatible to HDMI with a DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal.

HDCP on HDMI Output

[On]

ꢂ1

Depending on the connected equipment, some items may be

shaded in grey on the display and cannot be selected, or you may

not be able to change the settings.

[Off]

If you connect a DVI device that is not compatible with

HDCP, set to “Off”. In this case, some programmes or

DVD-Video cannot be seen.

ꢂ2

Choose the setting to suit your TV and preference.

VIERA Link

[On]

[Off]

Select when you do not want to use “HDAVI Control”.

Component Resolution

This sets the video output resolution when using the component

video terminal.

[576i/480i]

[576p/480p]

[720p]

[1080i]

• You cannot change the setting while the “HDMI Video Mode” is

set to “On”.

• Set the “HDMI Video Mode” to “Off” and set the “AV1 Output” to

“Video (with component)” or “S Video (with component)”.

• If it is set to “720p”, images other than “720p” will be output as

“1080i”.

• Even if you select “720p” or “1080i”, the video output resolution is

restricted to “576p/480p” when:

–freesat programmes in HD quality is output.

–DVD-Video discs and DivX discs recorded at a rate of 50 fields

per second are played.

–images via AV1, AV2, AV3, AV4 or DV input are output.

102

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Network Settings

Proxy Server Settings (➔ 107)

• Press [OK] to show the following settings.

Others

Setup

Initialize

Set the setting of the “Proxy Server Settings” back.

(➔ 95, Accessing the Setup Menu)

All factory default settings are indicated with “Underlined” text.

Proxy Address

(The initial setting is blank.)

Proxy Port Number

(The initial setting is “0”.)

Network Settings

e r

select “Network Settings” ➔

Connection Test

[----]

Network Settings

Access

IP Address/DNS Settings

Proxy Server Settings

Network Service

Network Service (➔ 107)

• Press [OK] to show the following settings.

Network Lock

You can restrict using VIERA CAST.

Follow the on-screen instructions. Enter a 4-digit PIN with the

numbered buttons when the PIN setting screen is shown. It will be

the common PIN for “DVD-Video Ratings”, “Child Lock”, “Parental

Control” and “Network Lock”.

RETURN

IP Address/DNS Settings (➔ 106)

• Press [OK] to show the following settings.

• Do not forget your PIN.

[On]

[Off]

Connection Test

[--]

Automatic Volume Control

[On]

IP Address Auto-assignment

[Off]

Select “Off” when the audio is warped while using

VIERA CAST.

[On]

[Off]

IP Address

[---.---.---.---]

Picture Zoom

[In]

The picture is enlarged.

[Out]

The picture is reduced.

Subnet Mask

[---.---.---.---]

• Select “Out” when display of the contents is truncated.

Gateway Address

[---.---.---.---]

DNS-IP Auto-assignment

[On]

[Off]

Primary DNS

[---.---.---.---]

Secondary DNS

[---.---.---.---]

Connection Speed Auto-configure

[On]

[Off]

Connection Speed Setting

This is enabled only when “Connection Speed Auto-conﬁgure” is

turned “Off”.

[10BASE half duplex]

[100BASE half duplex]

[10BASE full duplex]

[100BASE full duplex]

103

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

System Settings

System Update

In order to update this unit’s software and to support system

changes made by broadcasts, this unit periodically performs

software updates.

Others

Setup

• Press [OK] to show the following settings.

Software Update in Standby

(➔ 95, Accessing the Setup Menu)

All factory default settings are indicated with “Underlined” text.

[On]

You can perform the unit updates automatically when

the unit is turned in standby.

[Off]

Others

Software Licence

Information about software licence is displayed.

e r

select “Others” ➔

DivX Registration

Others

You need this registration code to purchase and play DivX

Video-on-Demand (VOD) content (➔ 50).

Automatic Standby

Remote Control

Clock

4 hours

DVD 1

Owner ID

PIN Entry

Power Save

System Update

DivX Registration

Initialize

Press [OK] to show the following settings.

Shipping Condition

This returns Setup menus to default settings, except for the

ratings level, PIN^ꢂ, Owner ID and Clock setting, etc.

[Yes] [No]

RETURN

• The timer recording programmes are also cancelled.

^ꢂPIN for DVD-Video playback, Child Lock, Parental Control and

VIERA CAST

Automatic Standby

Select how long the unit remains on when it is not being used.

[2 hours]

[4 hours]

[6 hours]

[Off]

Default Settings

This returns Setup menus to default settings, except for the

programmed channels, time settings, disc language settings,

ratings level, PIN^ꢂ, Owner ID and remote control code, etc.

[Yes] [No]

Remote Control (➔ 119)

[DVD 1]

[DVD 2]

[DVD 3]

Clock

^ꢂPIN for DVD-Video playback, Child Lock, Parental Control and

VIERA CAST

Press [OK] to show the following settings.

Auto Clock Setting

This unit usually obtains time and date information from digital

broadcasts. But, if the time is not set correctly, set it to “Off” and

perform the “Manual Setting”. (➔ below

[On] [Off]

)

Time Zone

Adjust the time data.

[Automatic]

The time data will be adjusted according to your

area automatically.

[GMT -6 to + 6] The time data will be corrected on GMT.

Manual Setting (➔ 15)

Owner ID (➔ 13)

In order to prevent another person from using this unit if it is

stolen, you can set a PIN and input your personal information.

Once the PIN has been set, you cannot return to the factory

preset. Make sure not to forget this.

• You can enter the PIN (➔ 13) to change the following personal

information.

–PIN

–NAME

–HOUSE NO

–POSTCODE

PIN Entry (➔ 14)

Power Save

[On] [Off]

Refer to the following when “Power Save” is set to “On”.

•

Power consumption is minimized when the unit is turned off

(➔ 14, step ).

• Startup of the unit becomes slower compared to when “Power

Save” is “Off”.

104

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Other Settings

Manufacturer

DAEWOO

DESMET

DUAL

ELEMIS

FERGUSON

FINLUX

FISHER

FUJITSU

FUNAI

Code No.

HOLD function

64 / 65

10 / 34

The HOLD function deactivates all buttons on the unit and

remote control. Use it to prevent other people from operating

the unit.

Press and hold [OK] and [BACK/RETURN ] at the

same time until “X HOLD” appears on the unit’s

display.

63 / 67

GOLDSTAR

GOODMANS

GRADIENTE

GRUNDIG

HIKONA

HITACHI

INNO HIT

IRRADIO

ITT

05 / 50 / 51

If you press a button while the HOLD function is on,

“X HOLD” appears on the unit’s display and operation is

impossible.

05 / 22 / 23 / 40 / 41

Tips

JINGXING

JVC

KDS

17 / 30 / 39 / 70

To cancel the HOLD function

Press and hold [OK] and [BACK/RETURN ] at the same

KOLIN

time until “X HOLD” disappears.

KONKA

05 / 50 / 51

LOEWE

MAG

METZ

MITSUBISHI

MIVAR

07 / 46

05 / 28

05 / 19 / 20 / 47

Using the Unit’s Remote Control to

Operate the TV

NEC

NOBLEX

NOKIA

NORDMENDE

OLEVIA

ONWA

You can configure the remote control TV operation buttons to

turn the television on/off, change the television input mode,

select the television channel and change the television

volume.

25 / 26 / 27 / 60 / 61

30 / 39 / 70

ORION

PEONY

49 / 69

41 / 48 / 64

05 / 06 / 46

37 / 38

TV operation

buttons

PHILCO

PHILIPS

PHONOLA

PIONEER

PROVIEW

PYE

PAGE

abc

def

Point the remote control at the TV.

While pressing and holding TV],

RADIOLA

SABA

[

enter the code from the table below using the

numbered buttons.

SALORA

SAMSUNG

SANSUI

SANYO

32 / 42 / 43 / 65 / 68

21 / 54 / 55 / 56

e.g., 01: press [0] ➔ [1]

Test the TV functions of the remote control for

operability.

SCHNEIDER

SEG

SELECO

SHARP

SIEMENS

SINUDYNE

SONY

05 / 29 / 30

05 / 69 / 75 / 76 / 77 / 78

05 / 25

– If the functions do not work, repeat steps

–

using different codes, if available. Some TVs may

not be compatible with the unit’s remote control.

TCL

31 / 33 / 66 / 67 / 69

10 / 11 / 12 / 13 / 14

10 / 15 / 44

16 / 57

Remote Control Codes for the TV

TELEFUNKEN

TEVION

TEX ONDA

THOMSON

TOSHIBA

WHITE

Manufacturer

Code No.

Panasonic

01 / 02 / 03 / 04

AIWA

AKAI

BEJING

BEKO

27 / 30

05 / 71 / 72 / 73 / 74

WESTINGHOUSE

YAMAHA

BENQ

58 / 59

18 / 41

BRANDT

BUSH

10 / 15

CENTREX

CHANGHONG

CURTIS

105

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Network Settings

These settings are used when you will connect this unit to a

network. The connection to the Internet may take time or the

internet may not be connected depending on the connection

environment. It is recommended that you use a broadband

connection.

IP Address

Please input IP Address and press “OK”.

The IP address will be cleared by pressing

“OK” when there is no number input.

Press “DEL” button if a wrong number is

entered.

192

Testing the connection

Always test the connection when a LAN cable is connected or when

Number

new “IP Address/DNS Settings” have been made.

Press [FUNCTION MENU].

Press [ , ] to select “Others”, then press [OK].

e r

Press [ , ] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].

w q

Press [ , ] to select “Setup”, then press [OK].

e r

Notes

Press [ , ] to select “Network Settings”, then

e r

• The numeric input range is between 0 and 255.

press [OK].

Press [ , ] to select “IP Address/DNS Settings”,

then press [OK].

e r

Setting the DNS-IP

In most cases, default settings can normally be used without making

any changes.

When setting an assigned DNS server from your internet service

provider, perform the following settings.

IP Address / DNS Settings

ConnectionTest

IP Address Auto-assignment

IP Address

After performing steps

–

(➔ left)

Subnet Mask

Press [ , ] to select “DNS-IP Auto-assignment”,

then press [ , ] to select “Off”.

w q

e r

Gateway Address

DNS-IP Auto-assignment

Primary DNS

Press [ , ] to select “Primary DNS” or

e r

Secondary DNS

“Secondary DNS”, then press [OK].

Connection Speed Auto-configure

Connection Speed Setting

Enter numbers with the numbered buttons, then

press [OK].

ꢁFollow the instructions given by your internet service

provider and enter the numbers. If the number is unknown,

then check the number of other devices such as personal

computers connected via a LAN cable and assign the same

number.

MAC Address: 00-0b-97-e6-7a-ae

RETURN

Press [ , ] to select “Connection Test”, then

e r

press [OK].

“Testing” : The test is in progress.

ꢁIf a wrong number is entered, then press [DEL].

Press [ , ] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].

w q

“OK”

: The connection is completed.

“Failed” : Please check the connection and settings.

Notes

• The numeric input range is between 0 and 255.

• Perform the “Connection Test” also when any change was made to

the “IP Address / DNS Settings”.

• If the connection test fails, it may be necessary to set the MAC

address of this unit at the router side. The MAC address can be

displayed by selecting “Network Settings” and “IP Address / DNS

Setting the connection speed

When the connection test results in “Failed” after the IP and DNS-IP

addresses are assigned, perform the following settings.

Settings” in steps

−

(➔ above).

After performing steps

–

(➔ left)

Press [ , ] to select “Connection Speed Auto-

conﬁgure”, then press [ , ] to select “Off”.

w q

e r

Setting the IP address

In most cases, default settings can normally be used without making

any changes.

Press [ , ] to select “Connection Speed Setting”,

e r

Set the IP address only when the router has no DHCP server

functions or when the router’s DHCP server function is disabled.

then press [ , ] to select a connection speed.

ꢁSelect a connection speed in accordance with the

environment of the network connected.

ꢁWhen the settings are changed, the network connection

may be disabled depending on the device.

w q

After performing steps

–

(➔ above)

Press [ , ] to select “IP Address Auto-

e r

assignment”, then press [ , ] to select “Off”.

w q

Press [ , ] to select “IP Address”, “Subnet

e r

Mask” or “Gateway Address”, then press [OK].

Enter numbers with the numbered buttons, then

press [OK].

ꢁAfter checking the speciﬁcations for your broadband router,

enter each number.

If the number is unknown, then check the number of other

devices such as personal computers connected via a LAN

cable. Assign a different number from those of other

devices for “IP Address” and the same number for others.

ꢁIf a wrong number is entered, then press [DEL].

106

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting the proxy server

Setting the network service (VIERA CAST)

In most cases, default settings can normally be used without

making any changes.

Please use this setting when instructed to by your Internet

provider.

Press [FUNCTION MENU].

Press [ , ] to select “Others”, then press [OK].

e r

Press [ , ] to select “Setup”, then press [OK].

e r

• Set the proxy server only after the connection test is

completed properly.

Press [ , ] to select “Network Settings”, then

press [OK].

e r

Press [FUNCTION MENU].

Press [ , ] to select “Network Service”, then

e r

press [OK].

Press [ , ] to select “Others”, then press [OK].

e r

Network Service

Press [ , ] to select “Setup”, then press [OK].

e r

Network Lock

Off

Press [ , ] to select “Network Settings”, then

press [OK].

e r

Automatic Volume Control

Picture Zoom

Press [ , ] to select “Proxy Server Settings”,

e r

then press [OK].

Proxy Server Settings

Initialize

Proxy Address

RETURN

Proxy Port Number

Connection Test

----

• Network Lock (➔ 103)

• Automatic Volume Control

Select “On”, the volume is controlled by this unit automatically. If

you want to enjoy the original volume, set it to “Off”.

• Picture Zoom

Select “In” to enlarge the picture, or select “Out” to reduce the

picture.

RETURN

Press [ , ] to select “Connection Test”, then

e r

press [OK].

Proxy Server Settings

Initialize

Proxy Address

Proxy Port Number

Connection Test

----

RETURN

“Testing...”: The test is in progress.

“Pass”:

The connection is completed.

Press [BACK/RETURN ] to exit.

Please check the connection and settings.

“Fail”:

Press [ , ] to select “Proxy Address”, then press

e r

[OK].

(➔ 82, Entering Text)

After the input of “Proxy Address” is completed

Press [ , ] to select “Proxy Port Number”, then

e r

press [OK].

Enter numbers with the numbered buttons, then

press [OK].

Proxy Port Number

Please input HTTP Proxy Server Port Number

and press “OK”.The number will be set to “0”

by pressing “OK” when there is no number

input. Press “DEL” button if a wrong number

is entered.

Number

Press [ ] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].

To set back to default setting

After performing steps

–

(➔ above)

1 Press [ ] to select “Initialize”, then press [OK].

e r

2 Press [ ] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].

107

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Software Update

Software of this unit can be updated automatically by

following method.

• From broadcasts

• From Internet [network connection and setting is required.

(➔ 106, 112)]

Update of the software is done when it is in standby mode.

Once the new software is found, it will start the download of

the software, and then update.

Download of the software will start automatically when the

power of this unit is turned in standby or when it is 3 a.m.

• The time it takes to update depends on the connection.

–For Broadcast: About 1 hour. (It may change depending on the

condition of the broadcast.)

–For Internet: About 1 hour (It may take longer than specified

above to download because the download time differs depending

on the network environment. It is recommended to be used in a

broadband environment.)

If you do not want to perform the software update during the

standby mode, set “Software Update in Standby” in the Setup

menu to “Off”. (➔ 104)

If a software update is available, a

notification is displayed

New software version has been found.

The software will be updated automatically

after the unit is switched to standby.

Do not disconnect the AC mains lead.

• Update of the software will start when the power is turned

off.

To start downloading

Press [OK].

To ignore the new software

Press [EXIT].

The unit’s display during the update

• “SW-DL”

: Software is downloading. Download will stop

when the power is turned on, or the timer

recording starts.

• “START” ^ꢂ: Update of the software will start once the

download is completed.

• “UPDꢄ/ꢄ”^ꢂ: Software is updating.

• “FINISH”

: Updated of the software has completed.

ꢂYou cannot operate the unit until the update is complete.

Removing the AC mains lead while the update is in progress

may damage the unit.

Notes

• If the timer recording is scheduled within the following time at the

start of the download, the download will not be executed.

–For broadcast: Within 4 hours

–For Internet: Within 1 hour

• If downloading on this unit fails or this unit is not connected to

the Internet, then you can download the latest software from the

following website and burn it to a CD-R to update the software.

http://panasonic.net/support/

108

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Additional Connections

•

Before connection, turn off the mains for all connected equipment and read the appropriate operating instructions.

Adding a Digital Satellite or Cable Receiver:

Connecting to aTelevision and a Digital

Satellite or Cable Receiver

Adding a VCR: Connecting to aTelevision

and a Video Cassette Recorder

RF coaxial cable

21-pin Scart cable

HDMI cable

RF IN

Digital satellite or cable receiver

You can enjoy

high-quality

picture by adding

the HDMI cable

connection (➔ 10).

HDMI IN

HDMI OUT

DISH INPUT

AV/TV

AV/VCR

This unit

AV1(TV)

This unit

HDMI AV

OUT

AV2 (EXT)

To the aerial

DISH IN 1

DISH IN 2

AV1(TV)

VCR

HDMI AV

OUT

AV2 (EXT)

RF IN

RF OUT

To record from a digital satellite or cable receiver

Refer to “Recording from a Satellite or Cable Receiver”

(➔ 62).

To record from a VCR

Refer to “Recording from an External Device” (➔ 63).

Your existing dish may require an upgrade to allow additional

satellite outputs.

21-pin Scart terminal

The 21 pin Scart terminal transmits both input

and output signals for picture and sound.

TVs equipped with the same type of terminal

can be connected here.

This type of terminal is also called Peritel,

Euro Connector and Euro AV.

AV1 Scart terminal (TV)

AV2 Scart terminal (EXT)

Audio output CH2 (R)

Audio input CH2 (R)

Audio output CH1 (L)

Audio ground

Blue ground

Audio input CH1 (L)

Blue output

Audio output CH2 (R)

Audio input CH2 (R)

Audio output CH1 (L)

Audio ground

Blue ground

Audio input CH1 (L)

Blue input

• When the unit is connected to a

Q Link compatible TV with a fully wired 21 pin

Scart cable, you can use convenient functions

of Q Link.

Switching voltage output

Green ground

Switching voltage input

Green ground

10 Q Link control signal

11 Green output

12 Reserved

10 Reserved

11 Green input

12 Reserved

9 11 13 15 17 19

13 Red ground

14 Blanking ground

15 Red output / chrominance output

16 Blanking output

17 Video output ground

18 Video input ground

19 Video output / luminance output

20 Video input

14 Blanking ground

15 Red input / chrominance input

16 Blanking input

17 Video output ground

18 Video input ground

19 Video output

8 10 12 14 16 18 20

20 Video input / luminance input

21 Ground

Using a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable

–

You can use a variety of Q Link functions by connecting the unit to a Q Link compatible television (➔ 84).

You can enjoy high-quality viewing by connecting the unit to an RGB compatible television when you are viewing

in the standard definition (SD) quality. Set “AV1 Output” in the Setup menu to “RGB 1 (without component)” or

“RGB 2 (without component)” (➔ 102).

– “AV2 Input” settings in the Setup menu (➔ 102).

109

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Additional Connections

• You can connect this unit to a TV using the audio/video (AV) cable, S Video cable or component video cables instead of the 21-

pin Scart cable (➔ 10, 11, 12, 109).

Using an Audio/Video Cable (not included)

Using an S Video Cable (not included)

The S VIDEO OUT terminal achieves a more vivid picture

than the VIDEO OUT terminal. (Actual results depend on the

television.)

AUDIO IN

VIDEO

S Video cable

Audio cable

This unit

AUDIO IN

S VIDEO

R - AUDIO - L

VIDEO

This unit

R - AUDIO - L S VIDEO

Using Component Video Cables (not included)

The COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminals on this unit can be used for either interlace or progressive output (➔ 135) to provide a

purer picture than the S VIDEO OUT terminal.

Component video cables

Audio cable

COMPONENT

VIDEO IN

AUDIO IN

P^BP^R

This unit

COMPONENT

VIDEO OUT

P^RP^B

R - AUDIO - L

Required settings

CRT

• Set “HDMI Video Mode” to “Off” (➔ 102).

• Set “AV1 Output” to “Video (with component)” or “S Video

(with component)” (➔ 102).

• Set “Component Resolution” to the item compatible with

connected equipment (➔ 102).

COMPONENT

VIDEO OUT

Use component output

with progressive “Off”.

COMPONENT

VIDEO IN

Notes

This unit

If you have a regular television (CRT: cathode ray tube)

Progressive output may cause some flickering, even if it is

progressive compatible. Set “HDMI Video Mode” in the Setup

menu to “Off” and “Component Resolution” in the Setup menu

to “576i/480i” if you are concerned about it (➔ 102).

This is the same for multi-system televisions using PAL mode.

110

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

You can improve sound quality by connecting this unit to an

amplifier or system component using the audio cable or the

digital audio cable (optical/coaxial).

Connecting with an HDMI (High Definition

Multimedia Interface) Terminal

When connected to an HDMI compatible unit, an

uncompressed digital audio and video signal is transmitted,

enabling you to enjoy high quality, digital video and audio

with just one cable. When connecting to an HDMI-compatible

HDTV (High Definition Television), the output can be switched

to 1080p, 1080i or 720p HD video.

• Please use High Speed HDMI Cables that have the HDMI

logo (as shown on the cover).

• When outputting 1080p signal, please use the HDMI cables

5.0 meters or less.

Using an Audio Cable (not included) for

Better Sound

Use this connection to play sound through speakers

connected to an amplifier or system component.

Amplifier or System Component

AUDIO IN

Regarding VIERA Link “HDAVI Control^TM” function

This unit

When connecting with a Panasonic TV (VIERA) or a

receiver equipped with the “HDAVI Control” function, linked

operations would be possible. [➔ 84, Linked Operations

with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI Control™”/Q Link)]

• Non-HDMI-compliant cables cannot be utilized.

• It is recommended that you use Panasonic’s HDMI cable.

Recommended part number: RP-CDHG10 (1.0 m), RP-

CDHG15 (1.5 m), RP-CDHG20 (2.0 m), RP-CDHG30

(3.0 m), RP-CDHG50 (5.0 m), etc.

R - AUDIO - L

Using a Optical Digital Audio Cable (not

included) for Better Sound

This method allows you to enjoy multi-channel surround

sound.

■ With OPTICAL

Using an HDMI (High Definition Multimedia

Interface) Cable (not included)

Amplifier or System Component

OPTICAL IN

Receiver

HDMI IN

HDMI OUT

HDMI IN

Insert fully with this side up.

Do not bend cable sharply.

This unit

AV1(TV)

HDMI AV OUT

OPTICAL

■ With COAXIAL

Connecting with a Panasonic TV (VIERA)

Amplifier or System Component

If the 21-pin Scart cable is connected, the Direct TV

Recording and Pause Live TV function is available. (➔ 37)

COAXIAL IN

• Set “HDMI Audio Output” to “On” (➔ 102). (The default setting is

“On”.)

• To enjoy High Quality Video up-converted to 1080p, you need to

connect the unit to 1080p compatible HDTV and set “HDMI Video

Format” in the Setup menu to “1080p” (➔ 102).

This unit

COAXIAL

Notes

• If connecting to equipment that is only compatible with 2

channel audio output, audio with 3 channels or more will

be down-mixed (➔ 134) and output as 2 channels, even

if connecting with an HDMI cable (some discs cannot be

down-mixed).

• Connect an amplifier or system component with a built-in

Dolby Digital, DTS or MPEG decoder.

• Adjust settings in “Digital Audio Output” (➔ 100).

• For display units compatible with HDCP (High-Band width

Digital Content Protection) that are equipped with a digital

DVI input terminal (PC monitors, etc.):

Depending on the unit, picture may not display properly or

at all when connecting with a DVI/HDMI switching cable

(audio cannot be output).

• If you connect a DVI device that is not compatible

with HDCP, set “HDCP on HDMI Output” in the Setup

menu to “Off” (➔ 102).

Notes

•

When this unit is connected to an amplifier with a digital audio

cable and connected to a television with an HDMI cable, you can

enjoy the highest quality of audio from the disc by setting “HDMI

Audio Output” to “Off” in the Setup menu (➔ 102).

In this case audio is only output from the ampl fier not the television.

You cannot use DTS Digital Surround decoders not meant for DVD.

Before purchasing an optical digital audio cable, check the terminal

shape of the equipment to be connected.

•

111

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Additional Connections

Network connection

Following function will be available when this unit is connected to the network.

ꢁThis document is assuming that you already have a broadband connection.

ꢁThis connection is not necessary if following functions are not to be used.

ꢁThe unit is connected to the internet when the following functions are used, which may generate communication charges depending on your

internet provider.

You can access a selection of Internet services from the Home screen with VIERA CAST, for example

YouTube, Picasa Web Albums. (Current as of February 2009) (➔ 83)

ꢁVIERA CAST requires a broadband Internet connection. Dial-up Internet connections cannot be used.

Enjoying VIERA CAST^TM

Automatically acquire the title

of the CD

Automatically acquire the title of the CD or the information about the artist. (➔ 80)

Update the software of this

unit

Automatically update the software of this unit. (➔ 108)

ꢁUpdate of the software can be done from the broadcast too.

Internet

This unit

LAN

10 BASE-T /

100BASE-TX

Straight LAN cable

Hub or broadband router

ꢁWhen your communication equipment (modem, etc.) has

no broadband router functions: Connect a broadband

router. When your communication equipment (modem, etc.)

has broadband router functions but there are no vacant

ports: Connect a hub.

Telecommunications

equipment (modem, etc.)

ꢁUse a router that supports 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX.

ꢁMake the necessary settings in “Network Settings” after connecting. (➔ 106)

Notes

ꢁRefer to the operating instructions for the connected device.

ꢁIt may not work properly depending on the equipment or environment used.

ꢁDepending on the contract with the provider, you may not be able to connect multiple numbers of terminals such as this unit or computers, or an

additional fee might be required.

ꢁUse only category 5 straight LAN cables (STP) when connecting to peripheral devices.

ꢁWhen operating the VIERA CAST, use high-speed Internet service no less than 1.5 Mbps for SD (Standard Deﬁnition) and 6 Mbps for HD (High

Deﬁnition) picture quality by your local broadband company.

- If using slow Internet connection, the video may not be displayed correctly.

ꢁInserting any cable other than a LAN cable in the LAN terminal can damage the unit.

112

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Operations that can be performed simultaneously

Operations that can be performed while recording or copying a title

(ꢃ: Possible, –: Impossible)

Playback of HDD

Playback of discs

Playback of still

pictures

Playback of music

recorded on HDD

ꢃ

While recording to HDD (in DR mode)

–

ꢃ^ꢂ

While recording from external equipment

to HDD (in XP, SP, LP, EP and FR mode)

While recording from DV input

–

While copying in normal speed mode

While copying in high speed mode

[With ﬁnalising or creating Top Menu

+RW

(

)]

ꢃ

While copying in high speed mode

–

[Without ﬁnalising or creating Top Menu

+RW

(

)]

AVCHD

ꢂ

It cannot playback.

ꢁSimultaneous operation is not possible while executing “DV Automatic Recording” or “Recording via AV3 input”.

Starting of the timer recording while executing other operation

Starting of timer recording possible during the following

operations

Starting of timer recording not possible during the following

operations

ꢁRecording the title^ꢂ1

ꢁPlaying the title^ꢂ2

ꢁEditing the title

ꢁCopying a title in normal speed mode

ꢁCopying a title in high speed mode (with ﬁnalising/creating top

menu)

ꢁCopying a title in high speed mode (without ﬁnalising/creating top ꢁCopying HD Video (AVCHD format)

menu)

ꢁEditing still pictures or music

ꢁCopying still pictures

ꢁCopying music

ꢁFormatting

ꢁFinalising/Creating Top Menu(

–Only 1 programme can be recorded

ꢁExecuting “DV Automatic Recording”^ꢂ3

ꢁExecuting “Recording via AV3 input”^ꢂ3

ꢁExecuting Pause Live TV^ꢂ1

+RW

)

^ꢂ1Executing operation will terminate when 2 programmes

simultaneous recording cannot be performed.

^ꢂ2Playback of disc stops when a timer recording in recording mode

other than DR has started.

^ꢂ3Executing operation will be terminated.

113

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Frequently Asked Questions

Page

Setup

How can I enjoy High Quality

Video up-converted to 1080p?

• Connect the unit to 1080p compatible HDTV using an HDMI cable.

Set “HDMI Video Format” in the Setup menu to “1080p”.

10, 102,

109

What equipment is necessary

to play multi-channel surround

sound?

• You cannot playback multi-channel sound on this unit without other equipment.

You must connect this unit with an HDMI cable, an optical digital audio cable

or a coaxial digital audio cable to an amplifier with a built-in (Dolby Digital,

DTS or MPEG) decoder.

111

Can the headphones and

speakers be directly connected to

the unit?

• You cannot directly connect to the unit. Connect through the amplifier, TV, etc.

−

The television has a Scart terminal • If you have a regular television (CRT: cathode ray tube), we recommend using

10-12

109,

110

and component video input

terminal. Which terminal should I

connect with?

the Scart terminal.You can enjoy high-quality RGB video from this unit by

connecting to an RGB compatible television.

If you have an LCD/plasma television or LCD projector compatible with

progressive scan, connect through the component video terminals for high

quality progressive video.

If you have a CRT television or a multi-system television using PAL mode

that is compatible with progressive scan, we cannot recommend progressive

output as some flickering can occur.

Is my TV progressive output

compatible?

• All Panasonic televisions that have 625 (576)/50i · 50p, 525 (480)/60i · 60p

input terminals are compatible.

−

Consult the manufacturer if you have another brand of TV.

When are the software updates

broadcast ?

• The unit shows automatically when a software update has been broadcast,

and also automatically updates the software if this function has not been

switched off in the Setup menu.

108

Page

Discs

Can I play DVD-Video bought in

another country?

• Playback of the following discs is not possible.

– DVD-Video discs that do not include region “2” or “ALL”.

Cover

Refer to the disc’s jacket for more information.

Can a DVD-Video that does not

have a region number be played?

• The region management information for DVD-Video indicates that the disc

conforms to industry standards.You cannot play discs that do not conform to

industry standards or do not have a region number.

−

Please tell me about disc

compatibility with this unit.

• Refer to “HDD and Disc Handling”.

20−22

114

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Page

Recording

Can I record from a commercially

purchased video cassette, DVD?

• Most commercially sold video cassette, DVD are copy protected; therefore,

recording is usually not possible.

−

Can the disc recorded on the unit

be played on other equipment?

• Refer to “Play on other players” in “HDD and Disc Handling”.

20-21

Can I high speed copy to a disc?

• Yes, you can. (But you may not high speed copy depending on the disc to

copy or the title.)

Depending on the disc type, the maximum speed varies.

Is it possible to copy to the disc,

SD card, or USB memory after

copying HD video (AVCHD format)

to the HDD?

• It can be copied to the disc.

−

RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW

It will be copied with SD quality. (It

cannot be copied as it is in HD picture quality.)

–

• It cannot be copied to SD card or USB memory.

−

MPEG-2 or AVCHD files are not

recognised.

• Only MPEG-2 or AVCHD on a Panasonic’s video camera, etc. will be

recognised. MPEG-2 or AVCHD copied to USB memory or an SD card will not

be recognised.

Page

TV Guide

Is it possible to programme a

recording, with a start and end

time that are different from the TV

Guide system?

• You can manually change the start and end time of programmes in the Timer

Recording menu.

But if timings are altered by more than 10 minutes, “Guide Link” will not be

able to function.

41, 42

Can I receive TV Guide system

data via a connected satellite or

cable receiver

• No, only via the built-in tuner. To perform timer recordings with satellite or

cable receiver, please use the External Link feature or your unit’s manual timer

programming.

39, 62

How can I cancel a timer

programming?

• Press [PROG/CHECK] and select the desired entry and then press [DEL].

41, 42

What happens when I unplug my

unit from the household mains

socket?

• The TV Guide system data will not be updated. If the unit is disconnected from

the AC mains for a longer period of time, then the TV Guide data is lost. And

if the unit is left unplugged for approximately 60 minutes, the clock and timer

recordings that have been set are lost.

−

Page

USB

What can or cannot be done using • You can play DivX, MP3 or still picture (JPEG) files on a USB memory.

49, 68, 75

the USB port on this unit?

• You can copy still pictures (JPEG) files on a USB memory to the HDD or

DVD-RAM.

• You can copy MP3 files on a USB memory to the HDD.

−

•

You can connect a video equipment and copy SD Video to the HDD or DVD-RAM.

• You can connect a video equipment and copy HD Video to the HDD.

• Data on the HDD or a disc cannot be transferred to a USB memory.

• Data on a USB memory cannot be edited or a USB memory cannot be

formatted on this unit.

−

• Some USB memories cannot be used with this unit.

Page

Music

What will happen if I try to record

the same CD multiple times?

• New album will be made following the existing album.

−

Can I transfer the music tracks from • No, you cannot.

HDD to the disc or USB memory?

−

115

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Messages

On the Unit’s Display

Page

•

An error has occurred. The number following “H” or “F” depends on the status of the unit.

Check the items below and in the Troubleshooting Guide. If the service number still does

not disappear after the check, reset the unit (➔ 119, “To restore the unit if it freezes” ).

−

Hꢄꢄ, Fꢄꢄ

(“ꢄ” stands for a service

number.)

• If the service numbers fail to clear, note the service numbers and contact a

qualified service person.

−

• The remote control and the main unit are using different codes. Change the code

on the remote control.

119

DVD ꢄ

(“ꢄ” stands for a number.)

EXT-L

• This unit is in EXT LINK standby. EXT LINK has been turned on and will stop

operation on the unit until the recording has completed.

Press [EXT LINK] to stop recording or cancel linked timer.

FINISH

GUIDE

HARD ERR^ꢂ

• The software update is completed.

• TV Guide data is being downloaded.

• If there is no change after turning the unit on and off, consult the dealer where the

unit was purchased.

108

−

NoERAS

NoREAD

• You cannot delete items on this disc.

−

The disc may be damaged. Use a new disc.

• The disc is dirty or badly scratched. The unit cannot record, play, or edit.

• The disc may be incompatible or of poor quality.

118

21, 22

• You have used a lens cleaner and it has finished operation. Press

[

OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit to eject the disc.

;

NoWRIT

• You cannot write to this disc.

−

The disc may be damaged. Use a new disc.

PLEASE WAIT^ꢂ

• Displayed when the unit is started or when turned to standby. This is not a

malfunction.

• The unit is carrying out its recovery process.You cannot operate the unit while the

message is displayed.

−

PROG FULL^ꢂ

REMOVE

START

•

There are already 32 timer recording programmes. Delete unnecessary timer recording programmes.

−

108

• The USB device is drawing too much power. Remove the USB device.

• Update of the software is started.

You cannot operate the unit until the update is complete.

SW-DL

• The unit is performing a software update.

108

Download will stop when the power is turned on, or the timer recording starts.

UNFORMAT^ꢂ

•

You inserted an unformatted DVD-RAM, DVD-RW, +RW, an unused +R, +R DL or

DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) that has been recorded on other equipment.

Format the disc to use it.

However all the recorded contents on the disc are deleted.

UNSUPPORT^ꢂ

• You have inserted a disc the unit cannot play or record onto.

• You tried to operate with a non-compatible USB memory.

21, 22

• The software is being updated.

You cannot operate the unit until the update is complete.

108

UPD ꢄ/ꢄ

(“ꢄ” stands for a number.)

U50

• The terminal, antenna cable or DISH is short-circuited as for both DISH IN 1 and

DISH 2. Check the connection status.

10, 11

U50 1

U50 2

U59

•

The terminal, antenna cable or DISH is short-circuited as for DISH IN 1. Check the connection status. 10, 11

The terminal, antenna cable or DISH is short-circuited as for DISH IN 2. Check the connection status. 10, 11

• The unit is hot.

−

The unit switches to standby for safety reasons. Wait for about 30 minutes until

the message disappears.

Select a position with good ventilation when installing the unit. Do not block the

cooling fan on the rear of the unit.

U61

•

(When a disc is not inserted) Displays when a malfunction has occurred during recording

or playback. This is displayed when the unit is in the recovery process to return to normal

operation; it is not broken. Once the display clears you can use the unit again.

−

U72

U73

• The HDMI connection acts unusually.

– The connected equipment is not HDMI compatible.

– Please use HDMI cables that have the HDMI logo (as shown on the cover).

– The HDMI cable is damaged.

U76

• HDMI cannot be output because you are connected to a model that does not

support copyright protection.

−

U77

U88

•

Due to the current disc not having authorised copyright information, video output is not performed.

−

121

There was something unusual detected with the disc while recording, playing or

copying; there was a power failure or the AC mains lead was disconnected while the

unit was on. The unit is carrying out its recovery process. This process restores the

unit to normal operation. The unit is not broken. Wait until the message disappears.

U99

−

• The unit fails to operate properly. Press [ ] on the main unit to switch the unit to

standby mode. Now press [ ] on the main unit again to turn the unit on.

X HOLD

• The HOLD function is activated.

Press and hold [OK] and [BACK/RETURN ] at the same time until “X HOLD” disappears.

105

ꢂThe message is alternately displayed.

116

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Page

On the TV

Authorisation Error.

• You are trying to play the DivX VOD content that was purchased with a

different registration code.You cannot play the content on this unit. (DivX)

Cannot finish recording completely. • The programme was copy-protected.

• The HDD or disc may be full.

−

• The maximum number of title has been exceeded.

Cannot playback.

TV system is different from the

setting.

• You tried to play a title recorded using a different encoding system from that of

the TV system currently selected on the unit.

Alter the “TV System” setting on this unit to suit.

101

To playback, please change the

TV System in Setup.

Cannot record to the disc.

Unable to format.

• The disc may be dirty or scratched.

118

Cannot play on this unit.

• You tried to play a non-compatible image.

• Turn the unit off and re-insert the card.

131

118

HDD RAM -RW(V) +RW

Cannot record. Disc is full.

•

Create space by deleting unwanted titles. Even if you

32, 51,

93, 98

delete recorded content from the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL, there is

no increase in disc space. Available recording space on a DVD-RW (DVD-

Video format) or +RW disc increases when the last title is deleted (space may

increase slightly when you delete other titles).

Cannot record. Maximum number

of titles exceeded.

• Use a new disc.

−

No Disc.

•

The disc is upside down. If it is a single-sided disc, insert it so the label is facing up.

118

132

118

No folders.

• There is no compatible folder in this unit.

No SD CARD

• The card is not inserted. If this message is displayed with a compatible card

already inserted, turn off the unit, remove and then re-insert the card.

• The format of the card inserted is incomplete.

No valid SD card.

• MPEG-2 or AVCHD will only be recognised when recorded on to the card from

Panasonic’s video camera, etc.

−

• Files on the card are not of the right type.

−

Not enough space in the copy

destination.

• Create space by deleting any unnecessary items.

32, 51,

93, 98

59, 73

• Delete one or more items registered on the copying list to ensure that the

“Destination Capacity” is not exceeded.

The disc is not recordable.

This disc is not formatted properly.

Rental Expired.

• The unit cannot record on the disc you inserted. Insert an unfinalised disc.

• You inserted an unformatted disc.

−

• The DivX VOD content has zero remaining plays.You cannot play it. (DivX)

This operation cannot be

performed now.

• Some operations are unsupported by the unit. For example;

−

AVCHD

–

During playback, reverse slow-motion or reverse frame-by-frame is

not possible.

This operation is prohibited by

this disc.

• Depending on the disc, you may not be able to perform search or skip when

film previews and warning screens are being played back.

−

When removing a recorded disc

-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL

The following screen appears when you have not processed the disc for play on other equipment.

Finalise

Finalise the disc to enable playing on other

DVD players.

Note: Recording or Editing is not possible

after finalising.This may take up to min.

Finalise the disc ?

Press the REC button to start finalise.

Press the OPEN/CLOSE button to exit.

This disc cannot be played on other players

without finalising.

■ To ﬁnalise the disc

Press [ REC].

• You cannot stop this process once you have started it.

• If you want to set the background, play menu select or provide a disc name, select “Top Menu” (➔ 94), “Auto-Play Select” (➔ 94)

or “Disc Name” (➔ 92) in “DVD Management” before finalising.

■ To open the tray without disc ﬁnalisation

Press [ OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit.

;

117

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Media (Disc/USB Memory/SD Card) Handling

Inserting Discs

Inserting/Removing the SD Card

When the card indicator (“SD”) on the unit’s display is

flashing, the card is being read from or written to. Do not turn

off the unit or remove the card.

Press [ OPEN/CLOSE] to open the tray.

;

– Insert a disc.

Cartridge disc

Such action may result in malfunction or loss of the card’s

contents.

Insert label-up.

Insert label-up with the arrow

facing in.

• Inserting foreign objects can cause a malfunction.

Inserting the card

Insert fully.

Press on the centre of

If you are using a

miniSD card, or a

microSD card, insert

it into the adaptor that

comes with the card.

Insert and remove this

adaptor from the unit.

the card until it clicks into

place.

e.g., miniSD

Press [ OPEN/CLOSE] to close the tray.

;

Notes

ADAPTER

• When using 8 cm DVD-RAM or 8 cm DVD-R, remove the

disc from the cartridge.

• It is not possible to record or play continuously from one

side of a double sided disc to the other.You will need to

eject the disc and turn it over.

Insert the card label up with

the cut-off corner on the right.

Automatic drive select function

RAM

[Only for discs with the write-protect tab on the cartridge

set to “PROTECT” (➔ 92, Setting Protection)]

Removing the card

1 Press on the centre of the card.

DVD-V CD

, MP3, JPEG, DivX

•

If the unit is recording to the HDD or stopped, it automatically

switches to the DVD drive when a disc is inserted.

2 Pull it straight out.

• If you eject a disc and close the disc tray, the HDD drive is

automatically selected.

Automatic drive select function

• If you insert an SD card while the unit is stopped, the “SD

Card” screen is displayed (➔ 66, 67, 68, 72).

• If you remove an SD card, the HDD drive is automatically

selected.

Inserting/Removing the USB memory

Inserting the USB memory

When the USB indicator (“USB”) is ﬂashing, the USB memory is

being read from. Do not turn off the unit or remove the USB memory.

Such action may result in malfunction or loss of the USB memory’s

contents.

Disc and Card Care

Holding a disc or card

Handle discs by the edges to avoid inadvertently scratching or getting

oil from your ﬁngers on the disc. Do not touch the signal surface of

discs (the shiny side) or the terminal surface (the metal part) of SD

cards.

Cleaning discs or cards

Discs are not indestructible and occasionally dirt or condensation

may appear. Clean by gently wiping with a soft, dry lint-free cloth in a

straight line from the centre of the disc to the edge of the disc.

Return discs and SD cards to their cases when not in use; this helps

to protect against scratches and dirt.

• Before inserting any USB memory to this unit, ensure that

the data stored therein has been backed up.

• Check the orientation of the USB connector and insert it

straight in.

Storing discs and cards

• Insert a USB device while the unit is stopped, so the “USB

device” screen is displayed. Select an item and press [OK]

to switch to the USB-related operations (➔ 49, 66, 67, 68,

72, 75, 80).

• Do not place or store discs and cards in the following locations:

–Direct sunlight

–Very dusty or humid areas

–Near a heat source

–Places that undergo extreme shifts in temperature (condensation

can occur)

–Where static electricity or electromagnetic waves occur

Keep the Memory Card out of reach of children to prevent swallowing.

Removing the USB memory

• Complete all USB-related operations and pull the USB

memory straight out.

•

• If a USB memory being accessed is pulled out, then the

data may be damaged.

Discs to avoid

• Discs that are not perfectly circular in shape

• Warped discs, which may not balance properly in your unit, causing

improper operation or damage to the unit

• Cracked discs

• Discs with exposed adhesive (from removed stickers or labels, such

as may occur with rental discs or improperly cared-for discs that

were previously labeled or re-labeled)

118

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Troubleshooting Guide

To reset this unit

When Other Panasonic Products

Respond to this Remote Control

To reset the unit’s settings

Use this function to synchronize the codes for the remote

control and the main unit when there are other Panasonic

products close to your unit.

All the settings except for the ratings level, PIN^ꢂ, Owner

ID and Clock, etc. return to the factory preset. The timer

recording programmes are also cancelled.

^ꢂPIN for DVD-Video playback, Child Lock, Parental Control

and VIERA CAST

With the unit stopped

Press [FUNCTION MENU].

Press [ ] to select “Others”, then press [OK].

e r

On the main unit

Press [ , ] to select “Setup”, then press [OK].

e r

Press and hold [ CH] and [CH ] for about 5

Press [ , ] to select “Others”, then press [OK].

e r

seconds.

– “freesat Auto Setup” (➔ 96) starts.

To reset the unit’s settings by using

the menu, see page 104.

Press [ , ] to select “Remote Control”, then

press [OK].

e r

Press [ , ] to select the code (“DVD 1”, “DVD 2”

e r

or “DVD 3”), then press [OK] to set.

To reset the ratings level settings

While pressing and holding [OK],

press and hold the numbered button [1], [2] or [3]

With the unit stopped

corresponding to the code set in step

than 5 seconds to set.

for more

Press [ OPEN/CLOSE] to open the disc tray.

;

Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.

On the main unit

Press [OK] to complete.

When the following indicator appears on the unit’s display

Press and hold [ REC] and [ /✕1.3] for about 5

seconds.

To restore the unit if it freezes

– Change the code on the remote control to match

the code displayed for the main unit (➔ step ).

On the main unit

Press and hold [ ] for more than 10 seconds.

– The unit is turned in standby.

Tips

To return to the previous screen

To eject the disc forcibly

Press [BACK/RETURN ].

On the main unit

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

Press [ ] to switch to standby mode.

– If the unit doesn’t switch to standby mode,

restore the unit. (➔ above)

While the unit is turned in standby

Press and hold [ ] and [CH ] at the same time

for about 5 seconds.

Before requesting service, make the following checks. If you are in doubt about some of the check points, or if the solutions

indicated in the chart do not solve the problem, consult your dealer for instructions.

Updating to the latest software may solve the problem. (➔ 108)

The following does not indicate a problem with the unit:

• Regular disc rotating sound.

• Poor reception due to atmospheric conditions.

• Image disturbance during search.

• Periodic interruptions to the reception due to satellite broadcasting breaks.

• Operations are slow to respond when “Power Save” is set to “On”.

• Operations are not working due to a poor-quality disc. (Try again using a Panasonic disc.)

• The unit freezing due to the activation of one of its safety devices (➔ above, To restore the unit if it freezes).

• When the unit is turned on or off, there may be an unexpected sound.

119

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Troubleshooting Guide

General Issues

Power

Page

No power.

• Insert the AC mains lead securely into a known active household mains

10, 11

socket.

The unit does not turn on pressing

• Linked timer recordings with external equipment is in recording standby

[ ].

(“EXT-L” on the unit’s display blinks when [ ] is pressed). Press [EXT LINK] to

cancel the recording standby.

The unit switches to standby

mode.

−

• One of the unit’s safety devices is activated. Press [ ] on the main unit to

turn the unit on.

The unit is turned in standby

automatically.

• If you connected this unit to an “HDAVI Control” compatible TV with an HDMI

cable, or connected this unit to a Q Link-compatible TV with a fully wired 21-

pin Scart cable, this unit will be automatically set to standby mode when the

TV is set to standby mode.

This unit turns off when the TV

input is switched.

• If connected with an HDAVI Control 4 compatible TV (VIERA) with the

“Intelligent Auto Standby” setting activated on the TV, when switching the TV

input, the unit will be automatically turned to standby. For details please read

the operating instructions of the TV.

−

General Issues

Displays

Page

101

The display is dim.

• Change “Unit’s Display” in the Setup menu.

• Set the clock.

“0:00” is flashing on the unit’s

display.

The displayed time of this unit is

different from the actual recording

time or MP3 recording time.

• Times shown may disagree with actual times.

−

-R DL +R +R DL

-R

•

The remaining capacity does not increase even if titles

are deleted.

• Available space on a DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) or +RW disc increases

when you delete the last title (space may increase slightly when you delete

other titles).

• If you record or edit about 200 times or more, the remaining capacity of DVD-

R, DVD-R DL, +R, and +R DL is reduced and then recording or editing may

be disabled (for the second layer on DVD-R DL and +R DL, this happens after

about 60 times).

−

• While searching, the elapsed time may not be displayed accurately.

−

Compared to the actual recorded

time, the elapsed time displayed

is less.

• The displayed recording/play time is converted from the number of frames at

29.97 frames (equal to 0.999 seconds) to one second. There will be a slight

difference between the time displayed and the actual elapsed time (e.g.,

actual one-hour elapsed time may display as approximately 59 minutes 56

seconds). This does not affect the recording.

(Only when recording in NTSC)

104

The clock does not display on the

unit when switched to standby.

• Ensure “Power Save” is set to “Off”.

Available disc space display is

showing different from what was

used

• Available disc space display may be different from actual. Varying may be

large especially when recorded in DR mode.

−

120

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

General Issues

Operation

Page

Cannot operate the TV with the

unit’s remote control.

• Change the manufacturer code on the remote control.

• It may be necessary to set the code on the remote control again after

changing the batteries.

105

119

Cannot operate the disc.

• Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive when operating the disc.

The remote control doesn’t work.

• The remote control code is wrong. Change to the correct code.

• The batteries are depleted. Replace them with new ones.

• Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the main unit.

• Remove obstacles between the remote control and the main unit.

• Remove dust from the transmission window and the unit’s sensor.

• Coloured glass may obstruct the signal reception/transmission.

• Don’t place the signal sensor in direct sunlight or in areas that may be subject

to sun exposure.

119

−

•

It may be necessary to set the manufacturer code again after changing the batteries.

105

108

• The HOLD function is activated.

• Software is updating when “UPD ꢄ/ꢄ” is displaying on the unit’s display. Wait

until the update is completed.

The unit is on but cannot be

operated.

• Recording drive or playback drive has not been selected properly.

• Some operations are prohibited by the disc.

26, 27

−

116

−

•

The unit is warm (“U59” appears on the unit’s display). Wait until “U59” disappears.

• One of the unit’s safety devices may have been activated.

Reset the unit as follows:

Press [ ] on the main unit to switch to standby mode.

If the unit doesn’t switch to standby mode, reset the unit (➔ 119, “To restore

the unit if it freezes”).

“U88” is displayed and the disc

cannot be ejected.

•

The unit is carrying out the recovery process. The disc may be defective. Do

the following to eject the disc. Try another disc.

−

(1) Press [ ] on the main unit to switch to standby mode.

If the unit doesn’t switch to standby mode, reset the unit (➔ 119, “To

restore the unit if it freezes”).

(2) While the unit is turned in standby, press and hold [ ] and [CH ] on the

main unit at the same time for about 5 seconds. (Ejection may take extra

time depending on discs.)

Cannot eject a disc.

Startup is slow.

• The unit is recording.

−

• The unit may have a problem. Eject the disc as in (2) above.

• Linked timer recordings with external equipment is in recording standby (“EXT- 62, 105

L” on the unit’s display blinks when [ ] is pressed). Press [EXT LINK] to cancel

the recording standby.

If the HOLD function is activated, above operation does not work. Cancel the

HOLD function.

• Startup takes time in the following situations:

−

– A disc other than a DVD-RAM is inserted.

– The clock is not set.

– Immediately after a power failure or the AC mains lead is connected.

– When the unit is connected with an HDMI cable.

• Set “Power Save” to “Off”in the Setup menu. If connected with an HDAVI

Control 4 compatible TV (VIERA) with the “Standby Power Save” setting

activated on the TV, even with “Power Save” set to “Off” when the TV is in

Standby mode, the unit may take some time to startup.

104

General Issues

TV Guide

Page

The TV Guide system does not

receive any data.

• Check whether the clock is properly set.

• If signal quality is bad (ghost images or limited reception), the TV Guide

system may not be able to receive any data. Check the connection and retune

unit.

The empty field is displayed for

some or all stations.

• Some stations are not supported by the TV Guide system.

• Programme the Timer recording manually.

−

The TV Guide information is not

displayed properly.

• There was a programme change or TV Guide information from a broadcast

station was possibly not correctly transmitted.

Check the current programme, e.g. on the Web site for the TV Guide system

provider or station provider.

−

The TV Guide data is not updated. • Make sure that the time is set correctly. Set the clock manually.

121

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Troubleshooting Guide

General Issues

Digital satellite broadcast

Page

freesat Auto Setup cannot be done • Check connections and dish alignment. The dish needs to be pointing at Astra

−

completely.

2 at 28.2º East, and Eurobird 1 at 28.5º East.

• If the problem persists, consult your freesat registered retailer or call Freesat

(UK) Ltd on 0844 881 6700 or visit www.freesat.co.uk

−

freesat channels cannot be

received.

• Check the connections.

10, 11

• The satellite dish may not be pointing in the direction of the satellite, or

the direction of the satellite dish may have changed due to strong winds or

vibration. If problem persists consult your freesat registered dealer.

• Perform “freesat Auto Setup” in the Setup menu.

−

TV reception worsens after

connecting the unit.

•

This can occur because the signals are being divided between the unit and other equipment.

It can be solved by using a signal booster, available from electronics retailers.

−

Picture regularly breaks up on

some channels, “No Signal”

message is displayed.

•

Check “Signal Condition”. If “Signal Quality” or “Signal Strength” are displayed in red or constantly

changing, check satellite dish. If problem persists consult your freesat registered dealer.

Interference (known as impulse noise) from household appliances such as light switches,

fridges, etc. may cause picture break up and/or audio distortion. Use a high quality quad

shielded coaxial cable fly lead between this unit and antenna wall socket to minimise

impulse noise pickup. If problem persists consult your freesat registered dealer.

−

• When “No Signal” message is displayed, check satellite dish connection.

• Perform “freesat Auto Setup” in the Setup menu.

−

Picture very infrequently breaks up • Electrical atmospheric interference caused by local or distant lighting storms

−

on some or all channels.

or heavy rain and/or wind may cause pictures to break up and audio to mute

or distort momentarily.

• Impulse noise interference from an infrequently used electrical appliance, or a

passing vehicle or lawn mower with a “noisy” ignition system.

−

The digital satellite channel

information does not appear.

•

Select the length of time (3-10 sec.) in the “On-Screen Messages” in the Setup menu.

The digital satellite channel information will not appear during playback.

101

−

No Digital TEXT

Some functions of digital text do

not work.

After the Auto-setup, there aren’t

any stations in the station list.

• When subtitle is on or additional information in the digital satellite channel

information is displayed, Digital TEXT does not work.

−

• New functions introduced by broadcasters cannot be guaranteed to work.

−

• “Shipping Condition” was performed or the unit was in the delivery status. The

Auto-setup was then started and interrupted.

Do an Auto-setup again and let it continue right through to the end. The data is

only saved after this has been completed.

The Signal Strength is over 100 % (> 10) • Reduce the signal amplification at your satellite dish.

Interference or frozen /

disappearing image

•

Check “Signal Condition”. If “Signal Quality” or “Signal Strength” are displayed in red,

the signal is weak.

•

Check dish.

−

Check your postcode area is able to receive the freesat channels at www.freesat.co.uk

Weather conditions will affect signal reception (heavy rain, snow, etc.), in particular

in poor reception areas. Even during good weather the high pressure can cause poor

reception of some channels.

•

Turn off the unit and disconnect the AC mains lead then turn on again.

−

Some freesat channels do not

produce the sound in English by

default.

• This is due to broadcasts even if they have English sound. In this case, press

[OPTION] and set “Multi Audio/AD”. Please note that this setting cannot be

memorized if you disconnect the AC mains lead.

No picture output after changing the • After changing the “HDCP on HDMI Output” setting, turn the power of this unit

102

“HDCP on HDMI Output” setting.

off once, and turn it back on.

General Issues

VIERA Link

Page

VIERA Link doesn’t work.

• Check the HDMI cable connection. Check that “HDMI” is displayed on the front

display when the power for the main unit is set to On.

−

• Make sure that “VIERA Link” is set to “On”.

102

−

• Check the “VIERA Link” settings on the connected device.

• Some functions may not work if depending on the version of “HDAVI Control”

of the connected equipment. This unit supports “HDAVI Control 4” functions.

•

If the connection for the equ pment connected with an HDMI cable was changed, or if

there was a power failure or the plug was removed from the household mains socket,

VIERA Link” may not work. In this case, perform the following operations.

1. When the HDMI cable is connected to all equipment with the power on,

turn the TV (VIERA) on again.

−

“

2. Change the TV (VIERA) settings for the “VIERA Link” function to off, and then

set to on again. (For more information, see the VIERA operating instructions.)

3. Switch the VIERA input to HDMI connection with this unit, and after this

unit’s screen is displayed, check that “VIERA Link” is working.

The control panel does not appear.

•

The control panel is only displayed when connected to a TV with “HDAVI Control 2” or later function.

The operation on this unit (music

playback etc.) is interrupted.

• The operation on this unit may be interrupted when you press buttons on the

TV remote control that do not work for VIERA Link functions.

−

122

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

General Issues

Picture

Page

The images from the unit do not

appear on the TV.

Picture is distorted.

• Make sure the connections are pushed in firmly.

10, 11,

109, 110,

111

• Try connecting an alternative cable.

• Make sure recorder is connected to an appropriate AV input of the TV.

−

10, 11,

109, 110,

111

• Make sure the TV’s input setting (e.g., HDMI 1) is correct.

−

• The TV isn’t compatible with progressive signals. Press and hold [ ] and

[ /x1.3] on the main unit for about 5 seconds. The setting will change to

interlace.

• The TV isn’t compatible with RGB signals.

102

101

Set “AV1 Output” in the Setup menu to “Video (with component)”.

• The unit’s “TV System” setting differs from the TV system used by the disc

now playing. While stopped, keep pressing [ ] and [ OPEN/CLOSE] on the

;

main unit for 5 or more seconds.

The system switches from PAL to NTSC or vice versa.

• When this unit is connected with an HDMI cable, use a disc that matches with

this unit’s TV system.

• Picture may not be seen when more than 4 devices are connected with HDMI

cables. Reduce the number of connected devices.

−

• After changing the “HDCP on HDMI Output” setting, turn the power of this unit

off once, and turn it back on.

102

Television reception worsens after • This can occur because the signals are being divided between the unit and

−

connecting the unit.

other equipment. It can be solved by using a signal booster, available from

audio-visual suppliers. If it is not solved by using a signal booster, consult the

dealer.

Picture does not appear during

timer recording.

• Timer recordings work regardless of whether the unit is on or off. To confirm

the timer recording is going to work properly, turn the unit on.

−

• The screen saver function is activated.

−

101

The screen changes automatically.

•

Set “Screen Saver” in the Setup menu to “Off” to turn off the screen saver function.

The 4:3 aspect ratio picture

expands left and right.

Screen size is wrong.

• Use the TV to change the aspect. If your TV does not have that function, set

“HDMI Video Mode” to “Off” and “Component Resolution” to “576i/480i” in the

Setup menu.

102

•

If you connect an HDMI cable, set “Aspect for 4:3 Video” in the Setup menu to “16:9”.

101

• Check the settings for “TV Aspect” in the Setup menu.

It may be possible to adjust the display mode on the TV. Refer to your

television’s operating instructions.

−

Titles recorded with 16:9 aspect

are stretched vertically.

•

16:9 aspect programmes are recorded in 4:3 aspect in the following cases.

-R -R DL -RW(V)

–

If you recorded or copied using “EP” or “FR”

(recordings 5 hours or longer) recording mode

If you recorded or copied to a +R, +R DL or +RW

–

It may be possible to adjust the display mode on the TV. Refer to your

television’s operating instructions.

There is a lot of after-images when • Set “HD optimizer” in the Picture menu to “Off”.

playing video.

When playing DVD-Video using

progressive output, one part of the

picture momentarily appears to be

doubled up.

• If outputting from the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminal, set “HDMI Video

102

Mode” to “Off” and “Component Resolution” to “576i/480i” in the Setup menu.

If outputting from the HDMI terminal, “HDMI Video Format” to “576i/480i”. This

problem is caused by the editing method or material used on DVD-Video, but

should be corrected if you use interlaced output.

There is no apparent change

in picture quality when making

adjustments in the Picture menu

using the on-screen display.

• The effect cannot be seen with certain types of video.

−

The picture is distorted during play, • You may be playing a TV programme recorded with poor reception or

−

or video will not play correctly.

unfavourable weather conditions.

• The picture may be distorted or a black screen may appear briefly between

recorded titles in the following situations:

– between titles recorded with different recording modes.

– between scenes recorded with different aspect ratios.

– between scenes recorded with different resolutions.

– between playlist chapters.

• Make sure the connections are pushed in firmly.

10, 11,

109, 110,

111

• Try connecting an alternative cable.

−

123

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Troubleshooting Guide

General Issues

Sound

Page

No sound.

Low volume.

Distorted sound.

Cannot hear the desired audio type.

• Check the connections and the “Digital Audio Output” settings. Check the input 100, 111

mode on the amplifier if you have connected one.

• Check if TV is muted.

−

• Check if amplifier is muted.

• Sound is not output while fast-forwarding during chasing playback and

simultaneous record and playback.

• Turn “Sound Effects” in the Sound menu to “Off” in the following cases:

–

When using discs that do not have surround sound effects, such as Karaoke discs

–When playing bilingual broadcast programmes

• Audio may not be output due to how files were created. (DivX)

• The sound effects will not work when the bitstream signal is output from the

HDMI AV OUT terminal or the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal.

• Audio may not be heard when more than 4 devices are connected with HDMI

cables. Reduce the number of connected devices.

• To output audio from a device connected with an HDMI cable, set “HDMI

Audio Output” to “On” in the Setup menu.

−

102

−

• Depending on the connected equipment, the sound may be distorted if this

unit is connected with an HDMI cable.

Cannot switch audio.

• You cannot switch the audio in the following cases.

–

When the recording mode is XP and “Audio Mode for XP Recording” is set to “LPCM”.

–When “Recording Format for DVD” is set to “Video format”. (The default

setting is “Video format”).

100

• You have used a digital connection. Set “Dolby Digital, “DTS” or “MPEG” to

“PCM” or connect using audio cables (analogue connection).

100

•

There are discs whose audio cannot be changed due to how the disc was created.

−

General Issues

USB

Page

The contents of the USB memory

cannot be read.

• Remove the USB memory from the USB port and then insert again. If this

does not solve the problem, turn off and turn on the unit again.

• Check that the USB memory is inserted correctly.

• The format of the USB memory or of its contents is not compatible with the

unit. (The contents on the USB memory may be damaged.)

• The USB memory contains a folder structure and/or file extensions that are

not compatible with this unit.

• Turn off and then turn on the unit again.

• USB memories connected using a USB extension cable or a USB hub may

not be recognized by this unit.

−

118

23, 131

132

−

• Some USB memories cannot be used with this unit.

• If inserted during playback, recording or copying etc., the USB memory may

not be recognized by this unit.

−

• You can use USB memories with capacities up to 128 GB.

−

USB memory cannot be operated. • Turn the power of this unit off once, and turn it back on. If it cannot be

operated after that, set “VIERA Link” to “Off”.

102

124

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Playback Issues

Operation

Page

Play fails to start even when

• Insert the disc correctly with the label facing up.

118

20−22

−

[ ] (PLAY) is pressed.

• The disc is dirty, scratched or marked.

• You tried to play a blank disc or a disc that is unplayable on the unit.

Play starts but then stops

immediately.

• You tried to play a +RW that needs to have a top menu created on the

equipment used for recording.

• You may be able to copy a “One time only recording” title that was recorded to

DVD-RAM using a different Panasonic DVD Recorder to this unit’s HDD, but

play is not possible due to copyright protection.

−

•

When recording to DVD-RAM using EP (8 hours) mode, play may not be possible on

DVD players that are compatible with DVD-RAM. In this case use EP (6 hours) mode.

−

• You cannot playback while executing “Recording via AV3 input” or when

recording from the DV input.

• Make sure that the TV is turned on. If the menu or messages are displayed,

follow the on-screen instructions.

Audio and video momentarily

pause.

• This occurs between playlist chapters.

−

• This occurs between chapters and with partially deleted titles on finalised

DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW that

have been copied using the high speed mode.

• This occurs as scenes change during Quick View (Play x1.3).

−

•

When playing a title recorded on both layers, the unit automatically

-R DL +R DL

switches between layers and plays the title in the same way as a normal programme.

However, video and audio may momentarily cut out when the unit is switching layers.

DVD-Video is not played.

• You have set a ratings level to limit DVD-Video play. Change this setting.

Ensure the disc is for the correct DVD-Video region number, and is not defective.

Cover

•

Alternative soundtrack and

subtitles cannot be selected.

• The languages are not recorded on the disc.

You may not be able to use the on-screen menus to change the soundtrack and

subtitles on some discs. Use the disc’s menus to make changes.

• After conversion from DR mode or copy to disc in mode other than DR it is not

possible to switch soundtrack and subtitles.

−

•

−

No subtitles.

• Subtitles are not recorded on the HDD or disc.

• Turn the subtitles on. Set “Subtitles” on the on-screen menu to “On”.

• Subtitles are not recorded in the following cases.

−

–When the “Subtitle” on the on-screen menu is set to “Off” and a DR mode

programme on HDD is converted to a different mode

–When the “Subtitle” on the on-screen menu is set to “Off” and a DR mode

programme on HDD is copied onto a disc with a different mode

Angle cannot be changed.

• This function depends on software availability. Angles can only be changed

during scenes where different angles are recorded.

−

You have forgotten your ratings

PIN.

• With the tray open, press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive, then

press and hold [ REC] and [ /x1.3] on the main unit simultaneously for

about 5 or more seconds.

• The PIN and the ratings level return to the factory preset (“0000”).

You want to cancel the ratings

level.

−

Quick View (Play x1.3) does not

work.

• Image may not be played back smoothly in case of DR mode titles, or

• This does not work while recording in XP or FR mode.

−

AVCHD

The resume play function does not • Memorized positions are cancelled when

–open the disc tray.

−

work.

–

(

turn off the power.

Memorized positions will not be cancelled)

SD CD USB

HDD

Time Slip, Manual Skip, etc. do not • These functions do not work with finalised discs.

−

• Time Slip does not work when the unit’s “TV System” settings are different

from the title recorded on the disc.

• Slow-motion playback in reverse does not work for title that has copied the

AVCHD, and

work.

101

Slow-motion playback does not go

reverse.

−

AVCHD

Reverse frame-by-frame does not

work properly.

•

Reverse frame-by-frame cannot be done.

AVCHD

−

• Frame-by-frame backward for titles that have copied the AVCHD will be

reversed in 10 frame units.

•

Slow-motion and frame-by-frame do not work with the title recorded from radio service.

−

It takes time before play starts.

Picture stops.

• This is normal on DivX video. (DivX)

• Picture may stop if the DivX files are greater than 2 GB. (DivX)

Cannot see the beginning of the

title played.

• (If connecting to a TV that supports VIERA Link with an HDMI cable)

When [ ] (PLAY) is pressed on this unit’s remote control, you may not be able

to see the beginning of the title played until the picture is displayed on the TV.

Using [

], return to the beginning of the title.

125

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Troubleshooting Guide

Recording Issues Recording / Timer Recording / Copying / External input

Page

Timer recording does not work

properly.

• The timer programme is incorrect or different timer programme times overlap

(

is displayed). Correct the programme.

• The programme is not in timer recording standby. (The timer icon “ ” in the

timer recording list is grey.)

1 Press [PROG/CHECK].

2 Press [ , ] to select the programme and press the “Red” button.

e r

Confirm the timer icon “ ” turns red.

• The clock is not correct. Set the clock.

• The programme information in the TV Guide system may not be correct. It is

recommended to modify the start and end times to allow a margin of a few

minutes.

Cannot record 2 programmes

simultaneously.

• It cannot in following conditions.

−

– Record 2 programmes from external input

– When performing high speed copying (1 programme can be recorded to

HDD)

– Recording from DV input, while “Recording via AV3 input”

• 2 dish inputs are required to record 2 programmes simultaneously.

−

The recording lacks the beginning • This occurs when the broadcast signals are not correct. We recommend you

or ending part of the programme

although the timer recording was

set on TV Guide.

set the timer again, allowing enough time for the start and end time. (Guide

Link function allows you to set the start time earlier and the end time later up

to a maximum of 10 minutes.)

Timer recording does not stop

• When using the linked timer recording with external equipment, press [EXT

LINK]. (“EXT-L” on the unit’s display disappears.)

even when [ ] is pressed.

The timer programme remains

even after recording finishes.

• The timer programme remains if set to daily, weekly or series timer recording.

39, 40

Cannot record.

Cannot copy.

−

• You can not record to the disc by pressing the [ REC].

RAM -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW

• The write-protect tab on the cartridge is set to “PROTECT” or the disc is

protected with DVD Management.

• Some programmes have limitations on the number of times they can be

copied.

•

The disc is unformatted. Format the disc.

32, 51,

93, 98

32, 51

• You cannot record when there is not enough space or when the number of

titles has reached its limit. Delete unwanted titles or use a new disc.

• In the following situations, you cannot copy. Delete unnecessary titles from the

HDD and then copy.

– If there is not enough space available on the HDD (If you will copy titles from

the HDD to a blank disc and fill the entire disc, HDD disc space equivalent

to 4 hours of SP mode recording is necessary.)

– If the number of recorded titles and the number of titles to be copied has

exceeded 499

−

• You cannot record and copy on finalised discs. However, you can record and

copy again if you format

• Due to peculiarities of

-RW(V)

-RW(VR)

you may be unable to

-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW

record onto or edit them if you either insert and remove the disc or switch the

unit on and off while a disc is loaded, a total of 30 times.

• The discs recorded on this unit may not be recordable on other Panasonic

DVD Recorders.

• Discs recorded on equipment other than this unit may not be able to be

recorded to.

−

101

• This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have PAL signal

recordings.

(However, both types of programmes can be recorded onto the HDD.)

Play of discs recorded with both PAL and NTSC on another unit is not guaranteed.

• Some broadcasts are copyright protected.

−

• Some programmes on freesat channels are copy-restricted.

Part or all of a recorded title has

been lost.

• If the power shuts down or the AC mains lead is disconnected from the

household mains socket while recording or editing, the title may be lost or the

HDD/disc may become unusable. We cannot offer any guarantee regarding

lost titles or discs.You will have to format the disc (_{HDD RAM -RW(V) +RW}) or

use a new disc.

−

• If you use Auto Renewal Recording, the old title will be deleted after the new

title is recorded.

The quality has dropped when the • Titles in HD quality (titles recorded in DR, HG, HX, HE, HL mode or titles in

−

title in HDD is copied to the disc.

AVCHD) will be copied as SD quality when copied.

126

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Recording Issues Recording / Timer Recording / Copying / External input (Continued)

Page

Stripe-shaped black noise is

recorded.

• An external playback device is interfering with the TV because the device is

too close to the TV. Move the device away from the TV.

−

The programme name and the

recorded title do not match.

Cannot copy to a disc using the

high speed mode.

• There was a programme change after timer recording was set but the

recorded title still has the old programme name.

• High speed copying cannot be performed depending on the disc or title that is

being copied. Refer to “When is high speed copy not possible?” for details.

−

When copying, it takes a long time • Use a disc that is compatible with high speed recording. Even if the disc is

even in high speed mode.

high speed recording compatible, the maximum speed may not be possible

due to the condition of the disc.

• It takes longer than normal to copy many titles.

−

• You cannot high speed copy to DVD-R titles longer than 6 hours when using

other Panasonic DVD Recorders that are not compatible with EP (8 hours)

mode recording.

An unusually loud sound is coming • When high speed copying to a disc the sound of the disc rotating may be

−

from the rotating disc.

louder than normal, however, this is not a problem.

• If you want copy to perform more quietly, select “Normal (Silent)” in “DVD

Speed for High Speed Copy” in the Setup menu.

Cannot record from the external

device.

• The external device is not correctly connected.

• The proper external input channel (AV1, AV2, AV3, AV4, or DV) is not

selected. Press [INPUT SELECT] to change.

−

• Select the input channel for the equipment you have connected.

• If images cannot be recorded or if the recording is aborted, check the

connections and the DV equipment settings.

−

The DV Automatic Recording

function does not work.

• You cannot start recording until the images from the DV equipment appear on

the television.

• Recording may not be performed as desired if the time codes on the tape in

the DV equipment are not successive.

• Depending on the equipment, the DV Automatic Recording may not operate

properly.

−

• You can only record audio/video images on a DV tape.

−

You cannot press [INPUT

SELECT] to select external input

other than AV2.

• Press [EXT LINK] to cancel EXT LINK Standby mode.

Recording Issues Music

Page

Tracks could not be copied to the

HDD.

• If there are copyright protected tracks such as SCMS restrictions, they will not

be copied.

−

• Recording from CDs that do not conform to CD-DA specifications (copy

control CDs, etc.) cannot be guaranteed.

−

• Bonus tracks may not be copied.

−

Title of the newly released CD

cannot be acquired.

• Title cannot be acquired if the title is not registered in the built-in Gracenote^®

Database. Connection to the network is necessary to acquire title for the newly

released CD.

ID3 tag of an MP3 file is not

completely displayed.

• Only the track name and artist name can be displayed with this unit.

−

127

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Troubleshooting Guide

Editing Issues

HDD and Discs

Page

32, 51,

93, 98

118

−

Cannot edit.

• You may not be able to edit on the HDD if there is no available space.

Delete any unwanted titles to create empty space.

• The disc is dirty. Wipe with a damp cloth and then wipe dry.

• Disc may be defective or of poor quality.

Cannot format.

• You tried formatting a disc that is not compatible with the unit.

• The unit writes the chapter division information to the disc when you turn it off

or remove the disc.

The information is not written if there is an interruption in the power.

• These operations are not possible with still pictures.

• You cannot set points if they are too close to each other.You cannot set an

end point before a start point.

−

Cannot create chapters.

Cannot mark the start point or the

end point during “Partial Delete”

operation.

−

HDD RAM

Cannot delete chapters.

When the chapter is too short to delete, use “Combine Chapters” to

−

make the chapter longer.

• Available space on DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R, or +R DL does not increase even

after deleting previous titles.

• Available space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) or +RW increases when you

delete the last title.

The available recording time

doesn’t increase even after

deleting titles on the disc.

−

Cannot create a playlist.

• Creation or editing of playlists cannot be done on this unit.

−

Editing Issues

Still Pictures

Page

The contents of the card cannot

be read.

• Remove the card from the slot and then insert again. If this does not solve the

problem, turn off and turn on the unit again.

−

• The card format is not compatible with the unit. (The contents on the card may

be damaged.)

This unit is compatible with SD Memory Cards that meet SD Card

Specifications FAT12 and FAT16 formats, as well as SDHC Memory Cards in

FAT32 format.

• The card contains a folder structure and/or file extensions that are not

compatible with this unit.

131, 132

• You can use SD Memory Cards with capacities from 8 MB to 2 GB and SDHC

Memory Cards with capacities from 4 GB to 32 GB.

• When there are a lot of folders and files, it may sometimes take a few hours.

• When repeating copying or deleting, it may sometimes take a long time.

Format the disc or card.

−

Copying, deleting, and setting

protection takes a long time.

−

Still pictures (JPEG) do not

playback normally.

• The images that were edited on the PC, such as Progressive JPEG, etc., may

not play back.

131

128

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Other Issues

Network

Page

112

I can’t connect to the network.

• Has the LAN cable come unplugged? Check that the LAN cable is properly

connected.

• Have you plugged in a modular cable for use with a telephone into the LAN

terminal on this unit? Connect with a straight LAN cable.

• Is the power for the modem or broadband router turned on?

Turn the power on for each device.

112

−

• Is there a mistake in the network settings? Follow any instructions you may

have received from your ISP (Internet Service Provider) and make changes to

the settings.

−

• Are the broadband router settings correct? Read the operating instructions for

the broadband router.

• Is the broadband router and/or modem correctly connected?

Check the operating instructions for each device and connect accordingly.

• Does your Internet Service Provider (ISP) or service contract prevent multiple

terminals connecting at the same time? Check the content of your contract.

−

While using my PC, I cannot

connect to the network.

Other Issues

Other

Page

After performing an update, you

can no longer receive broadcasts.

Pause Live TV stops.

• Depending on the content of the update, some settings may have returned to

the preset values. Fix the settings again.

• Pause Live TV from AV1, AV2, AV3 or AV4 input stops when a timer recording

from external input started.

−

Language code list Enter the code with the numbered buttons.

Abkhazian:

Afar:

6566 Chinese:

6565 Corsican:

6570 Croatian:

8381 Czech:

6577 Danish:

6582 Dutch:

9072 Hausa:

6779 Hebrew:

7282 Hindi:

7265 Lithuanian:

7387 Macedonian:

7273 Malagasy:

7285 Malay:

7684 Rhaeto-Romance:

Tamil:

8465

8484

8469

8472

6679

8473

8479

8482

8475

8487

8575

8582

8590

8673

8679

6789

8779

8872

7473

8979

9085

7775

8277 Tatar:

Afrikaans:

Albanian:

Amharic:

Arabic:

7771 Romanian:

7783 Russian:

7776 Samoan:

7784 Sanskrit:

7773 Scots Gaelic:

7782 Serbian:

8279 Telugu:

8285 Thai:

8377 T betan:

8365 Tigrinya:

7168 Tonga:

8382 Turkish:

6783 Hungarian:

6865 Icelandic:

7876 Indonesian:

6978 Interlingua:

6979 Irish:

7383 Malayalam:

7378 Maltese:

7365 Maori:

Armenian:

Assamese:

Aymara:

Azerbaijani:

Bashkir:

7289 English:

6583 Esperanto:

6589 Estonian:

6590 Faroese:

6665 Fiji:

7165 Marathi:

7384 Moldavian:

7465 Mongolian:

7487 Nauru:

6984 Italian:

7779 Serbo-Croatian: 8372 Turkmen:

7079 Japanese:

7074 Javanese:

7073 Kannada:

7082 Kashmiri:

7089 Kazakh:

7176 Kirghiz:

7565 Korean:

6869 Kurdish:

6976 Laotian:

7576 Latin:

7778 Shona:

7865 Sindhi:

8378 Twi:

8368 Ukrainian:

8373 Urdu:

Basque:

6985 Finnish:

7578 Nepali:

7869 Singhalese:

7879 Slovak:

Bengali; Bangla: 6678 French:

7583 Norwegian:

7575 Oriya:

8375 Uzbek:

8376 Vietnamese:

8379 Volapük:

6983 Welsh:

8385 Wolof:

8387 Xhosa:

8386 Yiddish:

8476 Yoruba:

8471 Zulu:

Bhutani:

6890 Frisian:

7982 Slovenian:

Bihari:

6672 Galician:

6682 Georgian:

6671 German:

7789 Greek:

7589 Pashto,Pushto: 8083 Somali:

Breton:

7579 Persian:

7585 Polish:

7679 Portuguese:

7665 Punjabi:

7065 Spanish:

8076 Sundanese:

8084 Swahili:

8065 Swedish:

8185 Tagalog:

Tajik:

Bulgarian:

Burmese:

Byelorussian:

Cambodian:

Catalan:

6669 Greenlandic:

7577 Guarani:

6765 Gujarati:

7178 Latvian, Lettish: 7686 Quechua:

7185 Lingala: 7678

129

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Specifications

Recording system

DVD-RAM: DVD Video Recording format

DVD-R: DVD-Video format

DVD-R DL (Dual Layer): DVD-Video format

Video

Video system:

PAL colour signal, 625 lines, 50 ﬁelds

NTSC colour signal, 525 lines, 60 ﬁelds

MPEG2 (Hybrid VBR)/MPEG-4 AVC/H.264

DVD-RW: DVD-Video format

Recording system:

+R DL (Double Layer)

+RW

Video in (PAL/NTSC):

AV1/AV2 (21 pin), AV3/AV4 (pin jack) 1 Vp-p 75 Ω, termination

S-Video in (PAL/NTSC):

AV2 (21 pin), AV3/AV4 (S terminal) 1 Vp-p 75 Ω, termination

RGB in (PAL): AV2 (21 pin) 0.7 Vp-p 75 Ω, termination

Video out (PAL/NTSC):

AV1/AV2 (21 pin), Video Out (pin jack) 1 Vp-p 75 Ω, termination

S-Video out (PAL/NTSC):

AV1 (21 pin), S-Video Out (S terminal) 1 Vp-p 75 Ω, termination

RGB out (PAL/NTSC): AV1 (21 pin) 0.7 Vp-p (PAL) 75 Ω, termination

Component video output

(PAL 576i/576p/720p/1080i, NTSC 480i/480p/720p/1080i)

Y: 1.0 Vp-p 75 Ω, termination

Recordable discs

DVD-RAM:

2X SPEED (Ver. 2.0),

2-3X SPEED (Ver. 2.1), 2-5X SPEED (Ver. 2.2)

1X SPEED (Ver. 2.0), 1-4X SPEED (Ver. 2.0),

1-8X SPEED (Ver. 2.0), 1-16X SPEED (Ver. 2.1)

2-4X SPEED (Ver. 3.0), 2-8X SPEED (Ver. 3.0)

1X SPEED (Ver. 1.1), 1-2X SPEED (Ver. 1.1),

2-4X SPEED (Ver. 1.2), 2-6X SPEED (Ver. 1.2)

2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.0), 2.4-4X SPEED (Ver. 1.1),

DVD-R (SL):

DVD-R (DL):

DVD-RW:

+R (SL):

2.4-8X SPEED (Ver. 1.2), 2.4-16X SPEED (Ver. 1.3)

2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.0), 2.4-8X SPEED (Ver. 1.1)

2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.1), 2.4-4X SPEED (Ver. 1.2)

P_B: 0.7 Vp-p 75 Ω, termination

P_R: 0.7 Vp-p 75 Ω, termination

+R (DL):

+RW:

Audio

Maximum writing speed of discs

Recording system:

Dolby Digital (XP, SP, LP, EP mode: 2 ch),

Linear PCM (XP mode),

DVD-RAM:

DVD-R:

DVD-R DL:

DVD-RW:

+R:

+R DL:

+RW:

Up to 5X SPEED

Up to 12X SPEED

Up to 4X SPEED

Up to 8X SPEED

Up to 4X SPEED

Dolby Digital [DR mode (freesat), HG, HX, HE, HL mode: Max 5.1 ch]

Do by Digital Plus [DR mode (freesat): Max 5.1 ch]

MPEG [DR mode: 2 ch]

Audio in:

Input level:

Input impedance:

Audio out:

Output level:

Output impedance:

AV1/AV2 (21 pin), AV3/AV4 (pin jack)

Standard: 0.5 Vrms, Full scale: 2.0 Vrms at 1 kHz

More than 10 kΩ

AV1/AV2 (21 pin), Audio Out (pin jack)

Standard: 0.5 Vrms, Full scale: 2.0 Vrms at 1 kHz

Less than 1 kΩ

Maximum supporting speed of drive for each discs;

Refer “Recordable discs” (

➔

above).

Notes

Digital audio out: Optical terminal (PCM, Dolby Digital, DTS, MPEG)

Coaxial terminal (PCM, Dolby Digital, DTS, MPEG)

ꢁWhen recording or playing while copying, this unit may not copy at

the maximum speed.

HDMI terminal (PCM, Dolby Digital, DTS, MPEG)

ꢁDepending on the condition of the disc, this unit may not copy at the

maximum speed.

HDMI Output

19 pin type A: 1 pc

HDMI^TM(V.1.3a with Deep Colour, x.v.Colour^TM

)

ꢁThis unit supports “HDAVI Control 4” function.

Playable discs

DVD-RAM:

DVD Video Recording format, AVCHD format, JPEG

Internal HDD capacity

250 GB

DVD-R: DVD-Video format^ꢂ1, AVCHD format^ꢂ1, MP3^{ꢂ1, 2}, JPEG^{ꢂ1, 2}

DivX^{ꢂ1, 2}

DVD-Video format^ꢂ1, AVCHD format^ꢂ1,

MP3^{ꢂ1, 2}, JPEG^{ꢂ1, 2}, DivX^{ꢂ1, 2}

DV input

IEEE 1394 Standard, 4 pin : 1 pc

Type A: 1 pc

DVD-R DL (Dual Layer):

USB port

DVD-RW:

DVD-Video format^ꢂ1, DVD Video Recording format,

AVCHD format^ꢂ1

SD Card Slot

LAN (Ethernet) Port

1 pc

+R^ꢂ1, +R DL (Double Layer)^ꢂ1, +RW

DVD-Video, CD-Audio (CD-DA)

CD-R/CD-RW:

10 BASE-T/100BASE-TX

CD-DA^ꢂ1, MP3^{ꢂ1, 2}, JPEG^{ꢂ1, 2}, DivX^{ꢂ1, 2}

Television system

Tuner system:

Antenna receive frequency:

Input impedance:

Demodulation:

Optical pick-up

System with 1 lens, 2 integration units

Satellite (freesat, Other Sat.)

950 MHz to 2150 MHz

Nominal 75 Ω

(662 nm wavelength for DVDs, 780 nm wavelength for CDs)

LASER speciﬁcation

Class 1 LASER Product (Pickup)

QPSK, 8PSK

LNB input:

F shape terminal female, power supply 13 V/18 V

max. 350 mA, 22 kHz 0.6 Vp-p

Not provided

Wave length:

DVD

Laser power:

780 nm wave length

662 nm wave length

LNB output:

RF converter output:

Not provided

No hazardous radiation is emitted with the safety protection

Others

Region code:

5 °C to 40 °C

10 % to 80 % RH (no condensation)

AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz

Approx. 57 W

Operating temperature:

Operating humidity range:

Power supply:

Power consumption:

Dimensions (W×H×D):

Mass:

430 mm × 59 mm × 330 mm

Approx. 4.3 kg

Power consumption in standby mode:

Approx. 0.4 W (Power Save mode:ON)

Approx. 12 W (Power Save mode:OFF)

130

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Ofﬁcial DivX^®Certiﬁed product.

SD Card

Support

version

Plays all versions of DivX^®video (including

DivX^®6) with standard playback of DivX^®media

ﬁles. Certiﬁed to the DivX Home Theater Proﬁle.

GMC (Global Motion Compensation) is not

supported.

Slot:

SD Memory Card slot: 1 pc

SD Memory Card^ꢂ3, SDHC Memory Card

FAT12, FAT16^ꢂ4(In case of SD Memory Card)

FAT32^ꢂ4(In case of SDHC Memory Card)

Compatible media:

Format:

Data that can be played:

JPEG,SD (Standard Deﬁnition)-Video^ꢂ5,

DivX, DivX Certiﬁed, and associated logos are

trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are used under

license.

HD (High Deﬁnition)-Video

USB device

USB standard:

Format:

USB 2.0 High Speed

FAT16, FAT32

SD (Standard Deﬁnition)-Video

SD ^ꢂ5USB ^ꢂ6

Data that can be played:

Playable

media

MP3, JPEG, DivX, SD (Standard Deﬁnition)-Video^ꢂ6,

HD (High Deﬁnition)-Video^ꢂ7

Codec

MPEG2 (SD-Video Entertainment Video Proﬁle)

MP3

File format

SD-Video format conforming

HDD -R -R DL CD USB

Playable

media

HD (High Deﬁnition)-Video

SD USB ^ꢂ7

Playable

media

File format

MP3

ꢁFiles must have the extension “.mp3” or “.MP3”.

Codec

MPEG4 AVC/H.264

Compression 32 kbps to 320 kbps

rates

File format

AVCHD format conforming

Sampling rate 16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,

48 kHz

-R -R DL CD

ꢁCompat ble formats: ISO9660 level 1 or 2 (except for extended

formats) and Joliet

Number of

folders

Maximum number of folders recognizable (except

for HDD) : 300 folders (including the root folder)

ꢁThis unit is compatible with multi-session but reading or play of the

disc may take time if there are a lot of sessions.

ꢁOperation may take time to complete when there are many ﬁles

(tracks) and/or folders and some ﬁles (tracks) may not display or be

playable.

ꢁEnglish alphabet and Arabic numerals are displayed correctly. Other

characters may not be displayed correctly.

ꢁThe display order on this unit may differ from how the order is

displayed on a computer.

ꢁDepending on how you create the disc (writing software), ﬁles

(tracks) and folders may not play in the order you numbered them.

ꢁThis unit is not compat ble with packet-write format.

ꢁDepending on the recording conditions, the disc may not play.

Number of

ﬁles

Maximum number of ﬁles recognizable (except for

HDD) : 3000 ﬁles

ID3 tags

compatible

JPEG

HDD RAM -R -R DL CD SD USB

Playable

media

File format

JPEG conforming DCF (Design rule for Camera

File system)

ꢁFiles must have the extension “.jpg” or “.JPG”.

Number of

pixels

Between 34 × 34 and 8192 × 8192 pixels

(Sub sampling is 4:2:2 or 4:2:0)

Thawing Time Approx. 2 sec. in case of SD Card (8.1 M pixels,

JPEG)

Notes

ꢁSpeciﬁcations are subject to change without notice.

ꢁUseable capacity will be less. (SD card)

Number of

folders

Maximum number of folders recognizable: 99

folders (including the root folder)

HDD RAM -R -R DL SD USB

Maximum number

^ꢂ1Finalising is necessary for compatible playback.

^ꢂ2ISO9660 level 1 or 2 (except for extended formats) and Joliet

This unit is compatible with multi-session/border (except for DVD-R

DL).

of folders recognizable: 300 folders (including the

root folder)

Number of

ﬁles

Maximum number of ﬁles recognizable: 999

ﬁles

This unit is not compat ble with packet-write format.

^ꢂ3Includes miniSD cards. (A miniSD adaptor needs to be inserted.)

Includes microSD cards. (A microSD adaptor needs to be

inserted.)

HDD RAM -R -R DL SD USB

Maximum number

of ﬁles recognizable: 3000 ﬁles

MOTION

JPEG

Progressive

JPEG

not supported

^ꢂ4Long ﬁle name is unsupported.

^ꢂ5Video Recording conversion and transfer is possible from SD card

to HDD or DVD-RAM disc.

ꢁIt may take a few moments for still pictures to display.

ꢁWhen there are many ﬁles and/or folders, some ﬁles may not

display or be playable.

After Video Recording conversion and transfer to HDD or DVD-

RAM disc is completed, the playback becomes poss ble.

^ꢂ6Video Recording conversion and transfer is possible from USB

device to HDD or DVD-RAM disc.

After Video Recording conversion and transfer to HDD or DVD-

RAM disc is completed, the playback becomes poss ble.

^ꢂ7Video Recording conversion and transfer is possible from USB

device to HDD.

DivX

-R -R DL CD USB

Playable

media

File format

DivX

After Video Recording conversion and transfer to HDD, is

completed, the playback becomes possible.

ꢁFiles must have the extension

“.DIVX” or “.divx”, “.AVI” or

“.avi”.

Number of

folders

Maximum number of folders recognizable: 300

folders (including the root folder)

Number of

Maximum number of ﬁles recognizable: 200 ﬁles

ﬁles

131

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Specifications

■ Structure of folders displayed by this unit

You can play MP3 and still pictures (JPEG) on this unit by

making folders as shown below. However depending on the

method of writing data (writing software), play may not be in the

order you numbered the folders.

ꢅꢅꢅ: Numbers

XXX: Letters

Card

Structure of MP3 folders

CD USB

DCIM

XXXXX

(Picture folder)

Preﬁx with 3-digit numbers in

the order you want to play

them.

Root

XXXX

.JPG

001 Folder

(file=track)

001track.mp3

002track.mp3

003track.mp3

Any folder with JPEG files

e.g.,

001

002 Folder

001track.mp3

002track.mp3

003track.mp3

004track.mp3

003 Folder

P0000001.JPG

P0000002.JPG

001track.mp3

002track.mp3

003track.mp3

(MPEG2 folder)

SD_VIDEO

PRG

Order of play

MOV

PRG

.MOD

.MOI

.PGI

Structures of still picture folders

CD USB

Files inside a folder are

displayed in the order they

were updated or taken.

Root

MGR_INFO

P0000001.jpg

P0000002.jpg

(MPEG2 information folder)

002 Folder

PRIVATE

AVCHD

(AVCHD folder)

P0000003.jpg

P0000004.jpg

P0000005.jpg

003 Folder

P0000006.jpg

P0000007.jpg

P0000008.jpg

P0000009.jpg

004 Folder

P0000010.jpg

P0000011.jpg

P0000012.jpg

Order of play

RAM

The following

can be displayed on this unit.

^ꢂ1Still pictures on the root ꢅꢅꢅ: Numbers

folder can also be

XXX: Letters

displayed.

Root

^ꢂ2Folders can be created on

other equipment. However,

these folders cannot be

selected as a copying

destination.

XXXX

JPEG

.JPG

DCIM

XXXXX

ꢁIf a folder name or ﬁle name

has been input using other

equipment, the name may

not be displayed properly or

you may not be able to play

or edit the data.

XXXX

.JPG

DCIM

XXXXX

XXXX

.JPG

132

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Gracenote^®Corporate Description

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.

Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Do by

Laboratories.

Music recognition technology and related data are provided by

Gracenote^®. Gracenote is the industry standard in music

recognition technology and related content delivery.

For more information visit www.gracenote.com.

Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #’s: 5,451,942;

5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 & other U.S. and

worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS and DTS Digital

Surround are registered trademarks and the DTS logos and

Rights Reserved.

Gracenote^®Proprietary Legends

Gracenote.This product and service may practice one or more of

the following U.S. Patents: #5,987,525; #6,061,680; #6,154,773,

#6,161,132, #6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6,240,459, #6,330,593, and

other patents issued or pending. Some services supplied under

license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent: #6,304,523.

This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is

protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights.

Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by

Macrovision, and is intended for home and other limited viewing

uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse

engineering or disassembly is proh bited.

Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks of Gracenote.

The Gracenote logo and logotype, and the “Powered by

Gracenote” logo are trademarks of Gracenote.

ꢁSDHC logo is a trademark.

ꢁPortions of this product are protected under copyright law and

are provided under license by ARIS/SOLANA/4C.

Gracenote^®End-User License Agreement

USE OFTHIS PRODUCT IMPLIES ACCEPTANCE OFTHETERMS BELOW.

This application or device contains software from Gracenote, Inc. of

Emeryville, California (“Gracenote”).The software from Gracenote (the

“Gracenote Software”) enables this application to perform disc and/or ﬁle

identiﬁcation and obtain music-related information, including name,

artist, track, and title information (“Gracenote Data”) from online servers

or embedded databases (collectively, “Gracenote Servers”) and to

perform other functions.You may use Gracenote Data only by means of

the intended End-User functions of this application or device.

HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Deﬁnition Multimedia Interface

are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.

This product is licensed under the AVC patent portfolio license and VC-

1 patent portfolio license for the personal and non-commercial use of a

consumer to (i) encode video in compliance with the AVC Standard

and VC-1 Standard (“AVC/VC-1 Video”) and/or (ii) decode AVC/VC-1

Video that was encoded by a consumer engaged in a personal and

non-commercial activity and/or was obtained from a video provider

licensed to provide AVC/VC-1 Video. No license is granted or shall be

implied for any other use. Additional information may be obtained from

MPEG LA, LLC. See http://www.mpegla.com.

You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software,

and Gracenote Servers for your own personal non-commercial use

only.You agree not to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the Gracenote

Software or any Gracenote Data to any third party.YOU AGREE NOT

TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE

SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS

EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.

“AVCHD” and the “AVCHD” logo are trademarks of Panasonic

Corporation and Sony Corporation.

You agree that your non-exclusive license to use the Gracenote Data,

the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you

violate these restrictions. If your license terminates, you agree to cease

any and all use of the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and

Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves all rights in Gracenote Data,

the Gracenote Software, and the Gracenote Servers, including all

ownership rights. Under no circumstances will Gracenote become

liable for any payment to you for any information that you provide.You

agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its rights under this Agreement

against you directly in its own name.

HDAVI Control™ is a trademark of Panasonic Corporation.

VIERA CAST^TMis a trademark of Panasonic Corporation.

Plays DivX^®video

DivX^®is a registered trademark of DivX, Inc., and is used under

license.

The Gracenote service uses a unique identiﬁer to track queries for

statistical purposes. The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric

identiﬁer is to allow the Gracenote service to count queries without

knowing anything about who you are. For more information, see the

web page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for the Gracenote service.

YouTube and Picasa are trademarks of Google, Inc.

“freesat” is a registered trademark and the “freesat” logo is a

trademark of Freesat (UK) Ltd.

The Gracenote Software and each item of Gracenote Data are

licensed to you “AS IS.”

x.v.Colour™ is a trademark.

Gracenote makes no representations or warranties, express or implied,

regarding the accuracy of any Gracenote Data from in the Gracenote

Servers. Gracenote reserves the right to delete data from the

Gracenote Servers or to change data categories for any cause that

Gracenote deems sufﬁcient. No warranty is made that the Gracenote

Software or Gracenote Servers are error-free or that functioning of

Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers will be uninterrupted.

Gracenote is not obligated to provide you with new enhanced or

additional data types or categories that Gracenote may provide in the

future and is free to discontinue its services at any time.

GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR

IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED

WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT.

GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE

OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR

ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE

LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES

OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES.

133

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Glossary

AVCHD

Film and video

AVCHD is a new format (standard) for high deﬁnition video cameras

that can be used to record and play high-resolution HD images.

DVD-Videos are recorded using either ﬁlm or video. This unit can

determine which type has been used, then uses the most suitable

method of progressive output.

Bitstream

Film:

Recorded at 25 frames per second (PAL discs) or 24

frames per second (NTSC discs). (NTSC discs

recorded at 30 frames per second as well.) Generally

appropriate for motion picture ﬁlms.

This is the digital form of multi-channel audio data (e.g., 5.1 channel)

before it is decoded into its various channels.

Decoder

A decoder restores the coded audio signals on discs to normal. This

is called decoding.

Video:

Recorded at 25 frames/50 ﬁelds per second. (PAL discs)

or 30 frames/60 ﬁelds per second (NTSC discs). Generally

appropriate for TV drama programmes or animation.

Deep Colour

This unit incorporates HDMI^TM(V.1.3a with Deep Colour) technology

that can reproduce greater colour gradation (4096 steps) when

connected to a compat ble TV.

Finalise

A process that makes play of a recorded CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R, etc.

possible on equipment that can play such media.You can ﬁnalise,

DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL on this

unit.

You can enjoy exceptionally rich, natural-looking colours, with smooth,

detailed gradation and minimal colour banding.

[A lower colour gradation (256 steps), without Deep Colour, will be

reproduced if connected to a TV which does not support Deep Colour.The

unit will automatically set appropriate output to suit the connected TV.]

After ﬁnalising, the disc becomes play-only and you can no longer

record or edit. However, ﬁnalised DVD-RW can be formatted for

recording again.

DivX

Folder

DivX is a popular media technology created by DivX, Inc. DivX media

ﬁles contain highly compressed video with high visual quality that

maintains a relatively small ﬁle size.

This is a place on the hard disk, disc or SD card where groups of

data are stored together. In the case of this unit, it refers to the place

where still pictures (JPEG) and MPEG2, etc. are stored.

DNS Server

Formatting

A server which acts like a telephone directory and translates Internet

domain names into IP addresses.

Formatting is the process of making media such as DVD-RAM

recordable on recording equipment.

You can format, DVD-RAM, DVD-RW (only as DVD-Video format),

+RW, SD cards and the HDD or unused +R and +R DL on this unit.

Formatting permanently deletes all contents.

Dolby Digital

This is a method of coding digital signals developed by Dolby

Laboratories. Apart from stereo (2-channel) audio, these signals can

also be multi-channel audio.

Frames and ﬁelds

Frames refer to the single images that constitute the video you see

on your television. Each frame consists of two ﬁelds.

Down-mixing

This is the process of remixing the multi-channel audio found on

some discs into fewer channels.

Drive

In the instance of this unit, this refers to the hard disk (HDD), disc (DVD)

and SD card (SD).These perform the reading and writing of data.

Frame

Field

ꢁA frame still shows two ﬁelds, so there may be some blurring, but

picture quality is generally better.

ꢁA ﬁeld still shows less picture information so it may be rougher, but

there is no blurring.

DTS (Digital Theater Systems)

This surround system is used in many movie theaters. There is good

separation between the channels, so realistic sound effects are

possible.

Gateway

Dynamic range

IP address of the electronic device providing Internet access. Usually

called a router IP address. (e.g., 192.168.0.1)

Dynamic range is the difference between the lowest level of sound

that can be heard above the noise of the equipment and the highest

level of sound before distortion occurs.

Dynamic range compression means reducing the gap between the

loudest and softest sounds. This means you can listen at low

volumes but still hear dialogue clearly.

HDD (Hard disk drive)

This is a mass data storage device used in computers, etc. A disk

with a surface that has been treated with magnetic ﬂuid is spun and a

magnetic head is brought in close proximity to facilitate the reading

and writing of large amounts of data at high speed.

HDMI (High-Deﬁnition Multimedia Interface)

Unlike conventional connections, it transmits uncompressed digital

video and audio signals on a single cable. This unit supports high-

deﬁnition video output [720p (750p), 1080i (1125i), 1080p (1125p)]

from HDMI AV OUT terminals. To enjoy high-deﬁnition video a high

deﬁnition compatible television is required.

Hub

Used for connecting more than one device to the network.

IP address

A set of numbers which distinguish each PC on the network when,

for example, connected to the Internet. When using a PC in a LAN to

access a PC or device that is not included in the LAN, the IP address

is called the local IP address. (e.g., 192.168.0.10)

JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group)

This is a system used for compressing/decoding colour still pictures.

If you select JPEG as the storage system on digital cameras, etc.,

the data will be compressed to 1/10–1/100 of its original size. The

beneﬁt of JPEG is less deterioration in picture quality considering the

degree of compression.

134

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

LAN (Local Area Network)

A group of linked devices in a company, school or home. Indicates

the boundaries of a particular network.

x.v.Colour^TM

x.v.Colour^TMis a name for devices that are compatible with the

xvYCC format, an international standard for expanded colour in

motion pictures, and that follow the rules for signal transmission.

You can enjoy vivid colours of wider colour ranges for a more realistic

picture when connected to a TV that supports the x.v.Colour^TMwith

HDMI cable.

LPCM (Linear PCM)

These are uncompressed digital signals, similar to those found on CDs.

MPEG2 (Moving Picture Experts Group)

A standard for efﬁciently compressing and expanding colour video.

MPEG2 is a compression standard used for DVD and satellite based

digital broadcasting.

1080i

In one high deﬁnition image, 1080 (1125) alternating scan lines pass

every 1/50th of a second to create an interlace image. Because 1080i

(1125i) more than doubles current television broadcasts of 480i

(525i), the detail is much clearer and creates a more realistic and rich

image.

MPEG-4AVC/H.264

A standard for efﬁciently compressing and expanding colour video.

MPEG-4AVC/H.264 is an encoding method used for recording of the

high deﬁnition videos.

1080p

In one high deﬁnition image, 1080 (1125) scan lines pass at the

same time every 1/50th of a second to create a progressive image.

Since progressive video does not alternate scan lines like interlace,

there is a minimal amount of screen ﬂicker.

MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3)

An audio compression method that compresses audio to

approximately one tenth of its size without any considerable loss of

audio quality.

24p

Pan&Scan/Letterbox

This is a progressive image recorded at a rate of 24 frames per second.

In general, DVD-Video is produced with the intention that they be

viewed on a widescreen television (16:9 aspect ratio), so images

often don’t ﬁt regular (4:3 aspect ratio) televisions. Two styles of

picture, “Pan&Scan” and “Letterbox”, deal with this problem.

720p

In one high deﬁnition image, 720 (750) scan lines pass at the same

time every 1/50th of a second to create a progressive image. Since

progressive video does not alternate scan lines like interlace, there is

a minimal amount of screen ﬂicker.

Pan&Scan: The sides are cut off so the picture

ﬁlls the screen.

Letterbox: Black bands appear at the top and

bottom of the picture so the picture

itself appears in an aspect ratio of

16:9.

Progressive/Interlace

Interlace is a conventional image signal that displays the image in 2

phases by splitting the display into odd and even scans. Progressive

will display whole image in 1 scan. Therefore, it will give high

deﬁnition image without ﬂickering compared with interlace.

Protection

You can prevent accidental deletion by setting writing protection or

deletion protection.

Router

Distinguishes the IP address assigned to each device, such as the

PC, and relays the ﬂow of data within the network.

RGB

This refers to the three primary colours of light, red (R), green (G),

and blue (B) and also the method of producing video that uses them.

By dividing the video signal into the three colours for transmission,

noise is reduced for even higher quality images.

Sampling frequency

Sampling is the process of converting the heights of sound wave

(analogue signal) samples taken at set periods into digits (digital

encoding). Sampling frequency is the number of samples taken per

second, so larger numbers mean more faithful reproduction of the

original sound.

Signal quality

This is the guide for checking the satellite dish direction. The

numbered values displayed do not indicate the strength of the signal,

but the quality of the signal (the signal to noise ratio, or “S/N”). The

channels you can receive are affected by weather conditions,

seasons, time (day/night), region, length of the cable that is

connected to the satellite dish, etc.

Subnet mask

Enables efﬁcient network use. A set of numbers which identify which

part of the IP address allocated to every device connected to the

router is the network portion.

Thumbnail

This refers to a miniature representation of a picture used to display

multiple pictures in the form of a list.

VIERA CAST

An information service unique to Panasonic where speciﬁc Web sites

can be viewed on this unit by connecting to the Internet without using

a PC.

135

RQT9431

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Safety precautions

Placement

CAUTION!

THIS PRODUCT UTILIZES A LASER.

Set the unit up on an even surface away from direct sunlight, high

temperatures, high humidity, and excessive vibration. These

conditions can damage the cabinet and other components, thereby

shortening the unit’s service life.

USE OF CONTROLS OR ADJUSTMENTS OR

PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE

SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS

RADIATION EXPOSURE.

DO NOT OPEN COVERS AND DO NOT REPAIRYOURSELF.

REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED PERSONNEL.

Do not place heavy items on the unit.

Voltage

WARNING:

Do not use high voltage power sources. This can overload the unit

and cause a ﬁre.

Do not use a DC power source. Check the source carefully when

setting the unit up on a ship or other place where DC is used.

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE, ELECTRIC SHOCK OR

PRODUCT DAMAGE,

ꢁDO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN, MOISTURE,

DRIPPING OR SPLASHING AND THAT NO OBJECTS

FILLED WITH LIQUIDS, SUCH AS VASES, SHALL BE

PLACED ON THE APPARATUS.

ꢁUSE ONLY THE RECOMMENDED ACCESSORIES.

ꢁDO NOT REMOVE THE COVER (OR BACK);THERE ARE NO

USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING

TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

AC mains lead protection

Ensure the AC mains lead is connected correctly and not

damaged. Poor connection and lead damage can cause ﬁre or

electric shock. Do not pull, bend, or place heavy items on the lead.

Grasp the plug ﬁrmly when unplugging the lead. Pulling the AC

mains lead can cause electric shock.

Do not handle the plug with wet hands. This can cause electric

shock.

CAUTION!

ꢁDO NOT INSTALL OR PLACE THIS UNIT IN A BOOKCASE,

BUILT-IN CABINET OR IN ANOTHER CONFINED SPACE.

ENSURE THE UNIT IS WELL VENTILATED.TO PREVENT

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK OR FIRE HAZARD DUE TO

OVERHEATING, ENSURE THAT CURTAINS AND ANY

OTHER MATERIALS DO NOT OBSTRUCT THE

VENTILATION VENTS.

Foreign matter

Do not let metal objects fall inside the unit. This can cause electric

shock or malfunction.

Do not let liquids get into the unit. This can cause electric shock or

malfunction. If this occurs, immediately disconnect the unit from the

power supply and contact your dealer.

Do not spray insecticides onto or into the unit. They contain

ﬂammable gases which can ignite if sprayed into the unit.

ꢁDO NOT OBSTRUCT THE UNIT’S VENTILATION OPENINGS

WITH NEWSPAPERS,TABLECLOTHS, CURTAINS, AND